JP6650191B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, various game machines such as a ball game machine, a torso game machine, an arrangement ball, a sparrow ball game machine, and the like have been widely known. Among these gaming machines, those equipped with a so-called “setting function” capable of setting an expected value of a profit to be provided to a player in a plurality of stages are known (for example, Patent Document 1 below). Therefore, what the setting value is is one of the great concerns of the player.

JP 2016-26756 A

  The set value is determined mainly by a person involved in the hall based on the business strategy of the pachinko hall, and is kept confidential at the start of business. However, if no setting guess element is given to the player, the player's anxiety that the player may be playing with a low setting gaming machine may be increased, and the player may be less willing to play the gaming machine.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can inform the presence or absence of a setting change in a staging manner and improve the gaming interest.

(1) Launching means capable of firing game balls toward a game area, lottery means capable of executing a jackpot lottery, display means capable of a predetermined display, and a player when the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result. Special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the user, and setting change for executing a setting change process capable of changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a predetermined setting change operation when a setting change condition is satisfied at power-on. And a processing means, wherein at a predetermined timing after the setting change processing, at a predetermined timing after the setting change processing, a setting change suggestion effect is performed which indicates that the setting change processing has been performed in the gaming machine having A gaming machine comprising a possible setting change suggestion effect executing means.
(2) Further, in the present invention, in addition to the above (1), the setting change suggestion effect is characterized in that the movable body is operated in a predetermined mode at the first symbol change after the power is turned on.
(3) In addition to the above (1), in the present invention, during the game, every time a predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect mode is sequentially changed, and the setting change suggestion effect is performed a specified number of times after the power is turned on. It is characterized by being executed at times.
(4) Further, the present invention is characterized in that, in addition to the above (1), the setting change suggestion effect is to make a part of the demonstration effect executed while waiting for the customer a special mode different from a normal mode.
(5) Further, in the present invention, in addition to any one of the above (2) to (4), the setting change suggestion effect executing means includes a setting change suggestion effect at a predetermined probability when a setting change process is performed at power-on. Is performed.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can improve a game entertainment can be provided.

It is a front view showing the appearance of the game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the composition of a game board and a production button. It is a block diagram showing a control device. It is a figure provided for explanation of a game state transition. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a screen display of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of main control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of a main control side main process. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power supply abnormality check processing in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the command transmission process in FIG. 6A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change management process in FIG. 6A. 6B is a flowchart illustrating a transmission command table selection process in FIG. 6B. 12 is a flowchart illustrating a first command data creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 6B. 6B is a flowchart illustrating a backup restoration process in FIG. 6B. 15 is a flowchart showing a second command data creation process in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a main control side timer interruption processing. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a second power supply abnormality check process in FIG. 16. 17 is a flowchart illustrating a setting error check process in FIG. 16. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start-up opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the front part of processing during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the post-processing part during special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric auditors product management process in FIG. 4 is an address map related to a memory space. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing the input state of the signal, the value of the W register, and the correspondence relationship among the three destination processing routes in the processing related to power-on in FIGS. 6A and 6B. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a source code (first half) corresponding to a part of the main control-side main processing and a processing order for each processing state. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a source code corresponding to a part of the main control-side main processing (the latter half) and a processing order for each processing state. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing source code according to a part of the setting confirmation processing. It is a figure showing a command transmission address table at the time of a setting change, etc. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a command transmission address table and the like when RAM is cleared. It is a figure showing a command transmission address table at the time of backup restoration. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of an effect control command in each processing route. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a setting completion command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design specification command receiving process. It is a flowchart which shows a notice effect lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows a morning one Gakkun notice lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows a background change notice lottery process. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows a demonstration / power-saving mode process. It is a flowchart which shows a menu management process. It is a flowchart which shows operation management processing during menu display. It is a flowchart which shows a payout ranking display process. It is an explanatory view provided for explanation of a setting change suggestion effect. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing a menu screen; It is explanatory drawing provided for explanation of a payout ranking display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of setting suggestion effects etc., and its execution timing. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a left part of FIG. 45. FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a right part of FIG. 45. It is a figure which shows the example of a schematic control of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the lottery table according to the setting value for a listening tile design notice. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening winning command receiving process. It is a figure showing a special winning opening winning sound selection table. It is a figure showing the lottery table of setting suggestion effect 07. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a setting suggestion effect 07. It is a figure showing an example of a setting guess element variable lottery form. It is a flowchart which shows an out ball number command receiving process. 31 is a flowchart showing variable lottery mode management processing 1 in FIG. 30. 31 is a flowchart showing a variable lottery mode management process 2 in FIG. 30. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit start command receiving process. 31 is a flowchart showing variable lottery mode management processing 3 in FIG. 30. 31 is a flowchart showing a variable lottery mode management process 4 in FIG. 30. It is a figure showing a table for exclusive use of a variable lottery mode (change pattern 1). It is a figure showing a table for exclusive use of a variable lottery mode (change pattern 2). It is a figure showing an example of an effect of a setting suggestion effect.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, an outline of a configuration of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front side of a gaming board.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3 a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. On the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 is changed. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 is released, and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is provided below the glass door 6. An upper tray unit 8 is provided on the front operation panel 7, and an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls is formed on the upper tray unit 8.

  Also, the upper tray unit 8 has a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the gaming machine 1 and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of a ball and a card return button 12 for requesting a return of a valuable medium inserted into the game ball lending device are provided.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a push button effect button 13 (first operating means (which also functions as a refreshing button 70 (rolling button) described later)), a button 75a pointing up, and a button pointing right. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operation means), which is composed of a button 75c pointing down, a button 75c pointing down, and a button 75d pointing left, is provided. The direction key 75 functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and enables the reception of operation input during a predetermined operation valid reception period in a specific notice effect (for example, a so-called “player participation type effect”). If a predetermined operation (for example, a single press, a long press, or a continuous hit) is performed during this valid period, the effect may be changed before and after the operation. In addition, these operation means are provided in a “game setting screen (volume setting, light quantity setting, light quantity setting, etc.) related to“ demonstration waiting effect ”and“ customer waiting effect (demo screen) ”described later. On the menu button on which the effect mode can be set), the effect button 13 is also used when the player performs a desired game setting. The effect button 13 is provided with a built-in lamp (button LED 13b) inside. According to the difference in the light emission mode of the button LED 13b, an operation reception valid period (for example, being lit or blinking in a predetermined color) and an operation reception invalid period (for example, being turned off) can be notified.

  On the right side of the front operation panel 7, a firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided.

  On both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15, there are provided speakers 46 for producing a sound effect (sound effect) by sound. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (directing LEDs) that exert a light effect by decorating light are provided in appropriate places of the gaming machine, for example, in the circumferential direction around the front frame of the glass door 6 or inside a center ornament 48 described later. Is provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the drawing, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 for guiding a shot game ball in a ring shape as a board surface dividing member. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

  A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 3a. The liquid crystal display device 36 independently controls a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) by numbers, characters, or symbols in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area) under the control of the effect control unit 24 described later. Various effects including a variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of three decorative symbols (see FIG. 5) of a medium symbol and a right symbol are displayed by images.

  In the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a far winding manner. The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and to distribute the flow path of the game balls to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. It acts as a flow channel distributing means that makes it possible. In the present embodiment, a play area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the firing device 32. Are distributed left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flow down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

  A non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is provided with an upper starting port 34 (for the first special symbol) and a lower section. The special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and the special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device) configured side by side in correspondence with the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). Second special symbol display device: second special symbol display means). In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by a variation display operation (variable display and stop display) of "special symbol" represented by 7 segments. In the liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time, and various notice effects (effect images). At the same time, the "decorative symbol change display game" is executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

  In addition, a composite display device (hold composite display LED display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is provided next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in the various function display units. The combination is called special symbol 1, special symbol 2, display of the number of active balls for normal symbol, and state notification during the variable time reduction function is activated (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (highly accurate). This is because it is a composite display device that has five display functions and is a hold / time saving / high accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, referred to as a “composite display device”).

  Further, the various function display unit is provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (ordinary symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, an ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by a variation display operation of an ordinary symbol represented by two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, a normal symbol by LED repeatedly turns on and off alternately in a seesaw manner and stops when either side is lit, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the normal symbol variable display game is correct. I have.

  A right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b determines whether the "right-handed" aiming for the game ball to pass through the right-downflow path 3c is advantageous depending on the combination of the ON / OFF state of the LED, or whether the game ball is in the left-downflow path 3b. It is informed whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is lit, it is notified that right-handing is advantageous, and if the light-emitting state is off, it is notified that left-handing is advantageous.

  Further, a round number display device 39c in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b is provided. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified round number (maximum round number) related to the big hit by the combination of the lighting / light-out state of the plurality of LEDs.

  Below the center ornament 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal fluctuation winning device 41 is provided on the upper and lower sides, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper opening sensor 34a, lower starting opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. Have been.

  The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol displaying device 38a (first special symbol displaying device). (Hereinafter, abbreviated as “Tokuzu 1” in some cases) is a winning port related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and does not have a “starting port opening / closing means” capable of opening or expanding the starting port. Winning device ". In the present embodiment, due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, a left downflow path to the upper starting port 34 is provided. The game balls flowing down 3b are configured to be easy to enter (prize), whereas the game balls flowing down the right flow path 3c are configured to be difficult or impossible to enter.

  The normal variable winning device 41 is configured as a “winning rate variable type winning device” that can change the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by the opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as starting port opening / closing means, and when the movable wing pieces 47 perform opening / closing operations, a lower starting port 35 serving as a second special symbol starting port is provided. Can be opened or expanded.

  The lower starting port 35 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 is a second special symbol in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 2”). , Which may be abbreviated as “special figure 2” in some cases) according to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting port 35 depends on the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. Then, the state is converted into an open state (easy winning state) for facilitating winning, and a closed state (hard winning state) that makes winning more difficult or impossible than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is not operated, the closed state (winning impossible state) in which it is impossible to win the lower starting port 35 is maintained.

  Also, on both sides of the ordinary variable prize winning device 41, there are provided a total of four general prize openings 43, three on the left side and one on the right side. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Above the normal fluctuation winning device 41 to the right, that is, above the middle part of the right flow-down path 3c, a normal symbol starting port 37 (third special) formed of a passage gate (specific passage area) through which game balls can pass. A symbol starting port (third starting means) is provided. The normal symbol starting port 37 is a winning port related to a normal symbol changing display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and has a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball therein. Are formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol starting port 37 is formed only on the right downflow path 3c side and is not formed on the left downflow path 3b side, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed in both downflow paths. .

  On the way from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right downflow path 3c, a special variable winning prize in which the large winning port 50 can be opened or enlarged by a squeezing type opening door 52b can be opened. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, inside which is formed a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening 50.

  The periphery of the special winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. I have. When the special winning opening 50 is closed by the opening door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 is formed, so that the downstream guiding portion ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in a region above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in a game region above the special winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to project the flowing game balls in the direction of the special winning opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the special winning opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects from the game board 3 and is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d projecting from the game board 3 surface, whereby the flowing direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the special winning opening 50 (downward). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered with the protruding and retracting type open door 52b (the special winning opening closed state), the game ball rolls over the special winning opening 50, and further a gauge configuration (not shown) The arrangement of the game nails leads the tulip-type ordinary fluctuation winning device 41 (the lower starting port 35) to the direction. At this time, if the lower starting port 35 is in a winable state (starting port open state), a game ball can win in the lower starting port 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the big winning port 50 Is open (large winning opening open state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50.

(Advantageous right-handed configuration under specific conditions)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player has aimed at the firing position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the player has aimed the gaming ball to pass through the right-downflow path 3c), the normal symbol starting port Although the game ball is easy to win at 37, the game ball is hardly guided or not guided to the upper starting port 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 operates. However, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state” described later. Therefore, in the case of the state with the electric support, instead of "left hit" for aiming the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b, aiming for the game ball to pass through the right flow path 3c is not determined. "Right strike" is considered advantageous. That is, whether the player hits the game “left” or “right” in a state that is advantageous to the player changes depending on the game state. It is advantageous that “left-handed” is advantageous in the below-described latent probability state), and “right-handed” is advantageous in the state with the electric support (for example, the time reduction state or the probable change state).

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the ordinary symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the ordinary symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be configured by a contactless switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a microswitch. The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-described winning means can be changed as appropriate according to the game characteristics. In addition, for each winning means, it is appropriately changed according to the game property whether the game ball flowing down the left downflow path 3b and / or the right downflow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot win, or can win. be able to.

  When a game ball wins at each winning opening, the number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, three upper starting ports 34, one lower starting port 35, zero normal symbol starting ports 37 (no prize balls), fifteen large winning ports 50, and six general winning ports 43 are paid out. It is. The game balls that do not win the above winning ports are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out ports 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball therein, or a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball therein, but a winning opening formed by a pass-through gate (for example, the ordinary symbol starting port 37). ) Means that the game ball passes through the gate. In practice, when a game ball is detected by each of the winning detection switches formed for each winning port, a "winning" is given to the winning port. Is treated as having occurred. The game balls related to the winning are also referred to as “winning balls”.

<Movable object>
In the game area 3a, a plurality of movable bodies are arranged at positions not obstructing the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed on the upper right side in the center decoration 48, and a second movable body accessory (flower-shaped accessory) is provided diagonally below and to the right. ) 90 are provided. A clock-type accessory 80, which is a first movable body accessory, includes a clock face 81 including a number display section partitioned into numeral sectors (I to XII), and is rotatable on the clock face 81. The watch has a clock hand 82 formed of a short hand and a long hand, and is configured as a watch-type accessory 80 as a whole. The flower-shaped accessory 90, which is the second movable body, has a corolla A2 composed of a plurality of petals arranged around a flower heart A1, and moves the flower heart A1 and the flower corolla A2 in the vertical direction (falling movement) or the horizontal direction. The first movable body 91 configured to be movable (projection movement) and the calyx B1 located around the outer periphery of the corolla A2 are attached to the tip of the stem B2, and the calyx B1 and the stem B2 can be moved vertically (falling movement). And the second movable body 92. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92) have a function of indicating the degree of expectation to win (winning degree of expectation) depending on the operation mode. It is also used when producing a setting suggestion effect described later (the same applies to a third movable body role described later).

<Normal button 13A, rotating light button 66, refreshing button 70: FIG. 2>
Further, a third movable body (a semi-transparent spherical movable body 73 containing the rotary lamp 62 and the light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the effect button 13 so as to be able to swing and rotate. The effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button: chance button) or a rotary light button 66 (second effect button) depending on the orientation of the built-in movable body 73 at rest (the position of the surface visible to the player). When the movable body 73 is rotating forward, it functions as the exhilaration button 70 (third effect button: rolling button).

  As shown schematically in FIG. 2, the effect button 13 is provided with a transparent press button type cylinder 72 having a relatively large surface area in a transparent frame 71 configured so that the surface thereof is integral with the saucer unit 8. The movable body 73 serving as the third movable body role is rollably or rotatably mounted inside or below the push button type tubular body 72 (hereinafter, simply referred to as inside the push button type tubular body 72). It has a structure in which it can be swung in multiple directions.

  The movable body 73 is disposed in the push button type cylinder 72, and is provided with a semi-transparent spherical empty frame which is rotatable about a horizontal axis and swingable in the left-right direction when viewed from a player. It is composed of a rotating light 62 and a light emitting device housed in a frame. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed or at a predetermined timing before and after the push button type cylinder 72, the movable body 73 performs a rolling operation (rotation and swinging motion), and the operation is illuminated with colored light from inside or around the empty frame. As a result, the structure is such that the player can visually recognize it from outside.

  The effect button 13 having the above-described structure has a “normal button 13A” depending on whether the operation mode of the movable body 73 at the time of the operation is “normally stationary”, “standby rotating light”, or “rolling operation”. (First effect button) "," rotating light button 66 (second effect button) ", and" exhilaration button 70 (third effect button: rolling button) ". Here, “normally stationary” means that the rotating angle position of the movable body 73 in the stationary state is 0 degrees, and the light-emitting body of the rotary lamp 62 (the top surface of the enclosure 64) passes through the push button type cylindrical body 72. This refers to a state in which the player is in a position not seen from above (a position hidden from the player). When the press button type cylinder 72 is pressed in this state, the effect button 13 functions as a normal button 13A (first effect button). In the present specification, the term “normal button 13A” indicates the effect button 13 in the case where the operation is performed during “normal stationary”.

  In addition, “rotating lamp standby” means that the rotation angle position of the movable body 73 in the stationary state is switched from the normal stationary position (0 degree) to the position rotated 90 degrees toward the front (90 degrees), and the rotation is performed. This refers to a state in which the light emission state of the lamp 62 (the top surface of the enclosure 64) is at a position viewed from above (a position seen by the player) through the push button-type cylinder 72. Under this state, the push button-type cylinder 72 is When pressed, the effect button 13 functions as a rotating light button 66 (second effect button). When functioning as the rotary light button 66 (second effect button), since the rotary light 62 can be seen from above through the push button type tubular body 72, it is possible to prompt the user to operate it. The operation can be visually recognized through the push button type cylinder 72. Therefore, the present invention is suitable for producing an announcement effect of a single announcement, and can produce a very tense moment. After the “rotating light standby” period has elapsed, the movable body 73 rotates 90 degrees to the back side and returns to the “normally stationary” position (0 °).

  Also, “during rolling operation” refers to a state in which the movable body 73 continues to rotate forward, that is, a state in which the movable body 73 is rotating around the horizontal axis as the rotation center axis as shown in FIG. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed while the movable body 73 is rotating, the effect button 13 functions as an exhilarating button 70 (third effect button). When acting as the exhilarating button 70, the player operates the rolling button 70 because the rolling operation (high-speed rotation) of the spherical movable body 73 can be seen from the outside through the transparent frame 71 and the push button type cylinder 72. At this time, it is possible to obtain a very satisfactory pleasure different from when the normal button 13A or the rotary light button 66 is pressed. After the “rolling operation” period has elapsed, the movable body 73 stops and returns to the “normal stationary” position.

  In the lower part of FIG. 2, of the three types of button functions used as described above, the functional parts of the rotary light button 66 and the exhilaration button 70 are separately shown. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, a switch 65 dedicated to the rotary light button 66 and a switch 74 dedicated to the exhilaration button 70 are illustrated as being present. However, only one switch is actually used. .

  The rotating light button 66 includes a rotating light 62 provided with a lamp (or LED) 62a as a light source and a reflecting mirror 62b as a reflector for reflecting light from the lamp 62a in a translucent red envelope 64. And is configured to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source by rotating the reflecting mirror 62b.

  Further, in the left view of FIG. 2, the rotary light 62 is illustrated as having a rotary light switch 65 when acting as a push button type rotary light button 66, and the enclosure 64 of the rotary light 62 is provided at a predetermined timing. Is pressed, the rotary light switch 65 is turned on, a hit notification sound is generated, and the rotary light 62 is operated. However, in practice, the rotating light 62 is housed in the empty frame (the shell portion of the movable body 73) in the right view of FIG. The push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, and the switch 74 is turned on by pressing the push button type cylinder 72 in the “standby state of the rotating light”, and the rotation is performed with the same result as the turning on of the rotating light switch 65. Light 62 is activated. The normal button 13 </ b> A that operates during “normally standing still” is a frequently used effect button in which not all effect means are necessarily operated. On the other hand, the rotary light button 66 is for one-time notification.

  When functioning as the exhilarating button 70, as shown schematically in the right side view of FIG. 2, the movable body 73 becomes “during a rolling operation” in which the movable body 73 continuously rotates at a high speed within the push button type cylinder 72. From inside or around, illuminate with colored light according to the expected winning degree (for example, color is developed in blue, green, red, danger pattern (D pattern), rainbow color (probable), and winning expectation is higher in this order) Then, a state occurs in which this state can be visually recognized from the outside by the player through the push button type cylinder 72. Since the exhilaration button 70 is operated on the premise of the appearance of this state, when the exhilaration button 70 is operated at the time of the big hit, the effect of the effect related to the big hit lottery result (the effect at the time of the operation) generated after the operation is significantly reduced. Can give a great pleasure to the player. The exhilarating button 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is rotatably and rollably incorporated in or below the push-button type cylindrical body 72, and thus functions as a button LED and also as a movable body accessory.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as a “main control unit 20”) that comprehensively controls the entire game operation (game operation control). In response to an effect control command from the main control unit 20, an effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter, “effect control unit 24”) that comprehensively controls the effect execution control (presentation control) by the effect means. ), A payout control board (payout control means) 29 for controlling the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power supply (including a backup power supply) required for each board of the gaming machine from an external power supply. And a power supply board (power control means (not shown)). Further, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. Note that the power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 has a microprocessor 202 having a built-in CPU 201 (main control CPU) and a ROM 202 (main control CPU) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

  Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies a periodic interrupt to the Z80 system, a CTC that provides a function of generating a pulse output at a fixed period (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function, and provides an interrupt signal to the CPU. An interrupt controller circuit that performs interrupt enable / disable functions such as timer interrupts, a reset circuit that can detect when power is turned on or off, or detect a power failure, and reset the CPU by outputting a system reset signal. Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit for monitoring abnormal operation of the vehicle, an out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit for monitoring whether or not a program is correctly executed within a preset address range, A counter circuit for generating random numbers is also provided. Note that at least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal received from a power supply board (not shown), and start executing necessary backup processing prior to power-off. The game operation before the cutoff can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, it is possible to hold the storage contents of each RAM for at least several days.

  The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number, and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and functions as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (size of random number: 65536)). , And use the random number value for the jackpot lottery. The random number for internal lottery is obtained by adding a soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and a hard random number value in order to prevent a hitting action such as hitting and hitting.

<Memory address map: FIG. 24>
Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, FIG. 24 shows an outline of an address map relating to a memory space (RAM 203, ROM 202) used by the main control unit 20. The memory space shown in FIG. 24 mainly includes two spaces, a memory space accessed by a 16-bit address and an I / O space accessed by an 8-bit address.

  As shown, the memory space used by the main control unit 20 includes addresses 0000H to FFFFH as a memory address map. More specifically, the addresses 0000H to 01FFH are in the memory space of the RAM 203 (512 bytes), the addresses 0200H to 0FFFH are unused areas where access is prohibited (hereinafter, referred to as “access prohibited areas”), and addresses 1000H. Addresses 1072H to 1072H are memory spaces of internal function registers (register groups for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 20), addresses 1073H to 7FFFH are access prohibited areas, and addresses 8000H to A7FFH are memories of the ROM 202. The space, addresses A800H to FFFFH, is allocated to the access prohibited area.

  As shown in the figure, in the area of the ROM 202, in a memory space (10240 bytes) from the address 8000H to the address A7FFH, the address 8000H to the address A6FFH describes a series of game control procedures. Addresses up to A77FH are assigned to the 'ROM comment storage area', addresses A780H to A79FH are assigned to the "CALLV instruction vector area", addresses A7A0H to A7A7H are assigned to the "interrupt processing vector area", and addresses A7A8H to A7FFH are assigned to the "HW parameter area". Have been.

  The “program / data area” of the ROM 202 includes a “game control program (program in the area)” for executing a game operation process related to a normal game progress such as a symbol variation display game and a hit game, and a base display described later. "Information display control program (outside area program)" for executing information display processing (base display processing) related to "performance information display" not directly related to the game progress, and an area for storing various fixed data related to the program It is. After resetting, the CPU 201 starts executing the program from the address 8000H. As shown in the figure, the RAM 203 is provided with work areas respectively corresponding to the in-area program and the out-of-area program (an in-area RAM area of addresses 0000H to 00FFH and an out-of-area RAM area of addresses 0100H to 01FFH). Have been.

  The “ROM comment area” is an area in which arbitrary data such as a program title, a maker name, and a product version can be set. The “CALLV instruction vector area” is an area for setting a higher-order address of a subroutine of a later-described CALLV instruction (CALLV instruction vector table), and the “interrupt processing vector area” is a start address of the timer interrupt processing (main). An area to be set (interrupt processing vector table). The “HW parameter area” is an area where parameters for setting the internal functions of the CPU in hardware can be set. The parameters set in the HW parameter area include, for example, a periodic reset setting, a system clock setting, an INT / NMI setting, a program end address (HPRGEND) used in a program / data area, a start address of an access prohibited area (HRAMSTAT), and The data includes an end address (HRAMEND), a security code, a maker code, a product code, and the like. Access to a program / data area (an area at addresses HPRGEND + 1 to A6FFH (an area where programs and data are not stored)) subsequent to the address set by the program end address (HPRGEND), a ROM comment area ( If an event such as an access to addresses A700H to A77FH, an access to an area (access prohibited area) between the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the end address (HRAMEND), or a write operation to the ROM area is detected, an illegal operation is performed. Assuming that an access has occurred, an illegal reset for resetting only the CPU core is generated. When an illegal reset occurs, the error state is controlled, the progress of the game is stopped, and the error cannot be released until a new setting value is set (until a setting change management process described later is executed). I have.

  Returning to the description of FIG. The main control unit 20 includes an upper starting port sensor 34a for detecting a prize to the upper starting port 34, a lower starting port sensor 35a for detecting a prize to the lower starting port 35, and a game ball to the normal symbol starting port 37. A normal symbol starting port sensor 37a for detecting the passage, a special winning port sensor 52a for detecting a winning in the special winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning in the general winning opening 43 are connected. The control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these. The main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (entered) based on the detection signals from these sensors.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (a so-called out ball) discharged from the gaming machine through the out port 49 and each winning port. The main control unit 20 includes an OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting unit that counts the number of out-balls based on a detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. The number of out-balls increases as long as the player continues to launch game balls from the launch device 32, regardless of whether or not the winning openings 34, 35 are won, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. I will do it. The launching performance of the launch device 32 is 100 shots per minute. For example, if today's total number of outgoing balls is 30,000, it means that the gaming machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes. Therefore, the number of out balls (total number of out balls) is one of the game result information defined by the specific value. This out-ball number information is used for calculating a base value described later. Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command (out-of-ball number command) including information capable of specifying the count result by the counting means to the effect control unit 24 based on a predetermined transmission condition. The out ball number command is used by the effect control unit 24 for control of transition to a variable lottery mode (FIG. 56) described later (details thereof will be described later).

  In addition, a fraud detection sensor (vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent behavior with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20. Based on the detection signal, it monitors the gaming machine for fraud.

  The main controller 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a special winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the special winning opening 50. Are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling these.

  Further, a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling display of the special symbols 1 and 2. I have. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main controller 20, and can transmit a control signal for controlling display of the normal symbols.

  Further, a composite display device 38c, a right-handed display device 39b, and a round number display device 39c are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 controls the display of various information displayed on these. The control signal can be transmitted.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external terminal board 21. The main control unit 20 controls the signal (outer end signal) of the game machine including predetermined game information via the frame external terminal board 21. It can be output to the outside. The frame external terminal board 21 is configured to be connectable to a so-called “data counter DT” or “Hall computer HC” provided outside the gaming machine. The end signal is sent to the "data counter DT" or the "hole computer HC". The main control unit 20 outputs, as the outer end signal, for example, winning game start information, winning information to the starting opening (special symbol change start information), award ball number information, security information (for example, vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor It is possible to output one or a plurality of outer end signals including an error, a magnetic sensor error, RAM clear, and information on a change in setting. Note that the data counter DT is game information capable of notifying specific game information (for example, the number of jackpots, the number of revolutions (the number of times the special symbol has changed), the change start / stop information of the special symbol, the winning information, etc.) regarding the gaming machine. It is a notification device, and is usually installed on the upper part of the gaming machine. In addition, the hall computer HC monitors and collects game information of the game machine based on the outer end signal output from the frame external terminal board 21, and comprehensively monitors the operation status of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the game store to be managed.

  A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20. When it is necessary to pay out a prize ball, the payout control board 29 is instructed to control the payout control command (the number of prize balls). The designated payout control command can be transmitted.

  A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls is connected to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, to transmit a state signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. It is.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with an out-of-supply detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting game balls to be paid out (prize balls), and the like. Each detection signal from these sensors can be received. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls. The payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. Can be transmitted.

  The payout control board 29 includes a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), the front frame 2 and / or the front operation. A door opening sensor 61 that detects an open state of the panel 7 is connected. The door opening sensor 61 according to the present embodiment functions as a door opening detecting unit. For example, the door opening sensor 61 is turned on when the front frame 2 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 4 (open state detection), and turned off when closed. It is configured to be in a state (closed state detection).

  Further, the payout control board 29 sends the state signal to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door open sensor 61, the replenishment detection sensor 19a, the ball counting sensor 19b, and the like. A "ball clogging signal" indicating a full state, a "door opening signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a "out of supply" indicating an insufficient supply of game balls from the game ball dispensing device 19. A signal that can transmit various status signals, such as a `` signal, '' a `` count error signal, '' which indicates that the prize ball has been dispensed insufficiently, or an abnormality has occurred in the number of prize balls, and a `` payout completion signal, '' which indicates that the payout operation has been completed. Has become. Based on these state signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open (a door opening error) and whether or not the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal ( The replenishment error) and whether or not the upper tray 9 is full (ball jam error) is monitored. In the above description, the detection signal (door open signal) from the door open sensor 61 has been described as being input to the main control unit 20 via the payout control board 29, but the main control unit 20 does not pass through the payout control board 29. 20 may be directly input.

  Further, a discharge control board 28 is connected to the discharge control board 29, and the discharge control board 29 can transmit a firing permission signal ES for permitting the firing operation to the discharge control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of the launch solenoid provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and launches the game ball by operating the launch operation handle. Operation is realized. Specifically, it is detected that the firing permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15. , The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the firing permission signal ES is not output, even if the firing operation handle 15 is operated, the firing operation is not executed, and the game ball is not fired. Further, the strength of launch of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the firing operation handle 15. The firing performance of the firing device 32 is 100 shots per minute. When the payout control board 29 detects the “ball clogging error”, it sends a ball clogging signal to the main control unit 20, and upon receiving the signal, the main control unit 20 sends a firing permission signal to the firing control board 28. Stop output of ES. As a result, the firing operation of the game balls is stopped until the full state of the upper tray 9 is eliminated.

  The main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, a setting key switch 94 for switching to a setting change allowable state where a setting value can be changed, and a setting change enable In this state, a setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value and a setting change completion switch 96 for fixing the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected, and the main control unit 20 operates the switches from these switches. The detection signal can be received. In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push-button switches operable by an operator, and the setting key switch 94 is used to set a setting key. A key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibited state (OFF) by being inserted and turned ON / OFF. These switches are formed at appropriate locations inside the gaming machine from the viewpoint of preventing improper operation such as illegal operation of set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, ON / OFF operations from outside the gaming machine are not possible. It is possible.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the setting value, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. . The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment includes one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but may be a payout control board 28, a firing control board 29, or a relay board (a relay board for relaying the connection between the control board and various display devices, switches, etc .: not shown). ) Or an effect control section (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 or the like, and can be provided at an appropriate place inside the gaming machine.

(About setting value)
The “set value” is to change the payout rate (so-called machine split (PAYOUT rate)) in a stepwise manner. In the present embodiment, six set values of settings 1 to 6 are provided. ing. This “set value” defines at least the lottery probability (winning probability) of the big hit (hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) in each of the settings 1 to 6 (six levels). The higher the is, the larger the jackpot lottery probability (big jackpot winning probability) is set, and this is advantageous for the player. For example, at the time of low probability, setting 1/410, setting 2 1/390, setting 3 1/370, setting 4 1/350, setting 5 1/330, setting 6 1/320, etc. is there. In other words, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine split), and this has an advantageous effect on the player. As described above, the set value is a value that mainly defines an event that affects the machine split for each stage, and means a value for a class related to the likelihood of occurrence of a specific event such as a big hit. Such “set value” is determined exclusively based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store). When the jackpot lottery probability is in the high probability state (when the later-described special symbol probability changing function is activated), the probability increases to a value not exceeding 10 times, and for each set value, the increase rate ( Ratios) are not different. In the above example, the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability is set to 1 to 6 = 1/410 to 1/320, and when the rate of increase is 10 times, the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability is set to 1 to 6 = 1/41 to 1/32.

  When a plurality of types of big hits are provided, the winning probability of one or more types of big hits can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of big hits, ie, big hits 1 to 4, as the set value is relatively higher, the winning probability of all of the big hits 1 to 4 may be increased, or some of the big hits may be configured. The winning probability of only one of the big hits 1 to 3 may be increased (in this case, the winning probability is common to all the set values for the big hit 4), or only a specific big hit (for example, only the big hit 1) ) May be configured to increase only the winning probability (in this case, the jackpots 2 to 4 have a common winning probability at all set values). Moreover, you may comprise so that the total winning probability of the big hits 1 to 4 may become high, so that a setting value is relatively high. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the activation of the condition device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the big hit described above.

(About changing the set value)
In this embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on, the setting change is permitted, and the power is turned on by other switch operations. It is controlled so that the setting change is prohibited. When the setting change switch 95 is turned ON in the setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is changed to “1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 →. The display is switched so as to circulate in the range of 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is decided as the current setting value, and the setting value data is stored in the predetermined area ( (Setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is ended, and thereafter, the game is started with the determined set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment, based on an operation of a predetermined operation unit, a setting value selection unit that selects one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player, Setting value setting means for setting the setting value selected by the setting value selecting means.

  In addition, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information on a special symbol change display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by an effect control command according to the processing state. . However, in order to prevent a goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a configuration of one-way communication in which a signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. Has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
In addition, a performance display 99 (information display means) for displaying (notifying) information (hereinafter, referred to as “performance information”) related to a game result in a predetermined period (specific game period) is connected to the main control unit 20, The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling the display. The performance indicator 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs. Specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment indicators 99a to 99d) each having a display unit and a circuit unit are united. Are mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to constitute a display capable of displaying four-digit numbers. Each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment numeral.

  In the present embodiment, the performance information includes, as the performance information, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is a low probability (the normal probability) and a state in which there is no electric support described later), and the cumulative total in the normal state. The number of out balls (normal number of outs) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of normal payouts by the number of normal outs is multiplied by 100 (calculated as normal number of payouts ÷ number of normal outs x 100). (Hereinafter, also referred to as a “base value”), which is displayed on the performance display 99 in a predetermined manner. Note that the display value is a value obtained by rounding off the first decimal place in a predetermined display mode. However, instead of simply measuring the count permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), if the total number of out-balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 60000), the measurement is temporarily terminated and the The base value at the end of the measurement is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the “specified number”, which is the trigger for the end of the measurement, is not the normal number of outs, but the total number of out balls in all game states (including the hit game) (hereinafter, “all states out”). "Number"). The number of all state outs is also measured in real time. Therefore, the data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the base value for calculating the base value and the data of the total state out number are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (the normal payout number storage area, the normal The time-out number storage area, the specific ratio information storage area, and the total state out number storage area are respectively stored and used as needed. In the following, for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise required, various data used for calculating the base value (the above-described normal payout number storage area, normal out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area, and all state outs) The storage areas (number storage area) are collectively referred to as a “measurement information storage area”.

  After storing the current base value as the history information, the measurement information storage area used in the current measurement is cleared to zero, and the next normal payout number, normal out number, base value, and all state out balls are cleared. Start counting and measure the new base value in real time.

  In the performance indicator 99 of the present embodiment, the previous base value (history base value) as the above-described history information and the base value currently measured in real time (real-time base value) are alternately provided at predetermined time intervals. The display is switched (it may be configured to be able to be displayed simultaneously). In the case of the present embodiment, of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99, the two 7-segment indicators 99a and 99b in the left half on the front side indicate whether the currently displayed value is a real-time base value or not. It functions as an "identification display section (identification segment)" for displaying identification information (identifier) for identifying whether it is a base value. On the other hand, the two right-half halves of the seven-segment display 99c and 99d have a base. It is designed to function as a "base display section (ratio segment)" for displaying a value. For example, when "real-time base value" is displayed on the base display section (ratio segment), "bL." Is displayed on the identification display section, and when "history base value" is displayed, "b6." Is displayed (identifier display), and it is notified that the currently displayed base value is a real-time base value or a history base value so as to be identifiable. Therefore, the entire display (“identification display section (identification seg) + base display section (ratio seg)”) of the performance display 99 (7-segment display 99a to 99d) is, for example, “31” when the real-time base value is 31. bL.31 ", and if the history base value is 29," b6.29 "is displayed. The base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding off the first decimal place. When the value after rounding is three digits or more, “99.” indicating an overflow is displayed on the base display.

  The above-mentioned "performance information" is mainly used by pachinko parlors and related agencies for confirmation and investigation.For example, if there is an abnormality in the payout performance due to improper adjustment of game nails or goto action, etc. This is information for investigating whether or not such a phenomenon has occurred or whether or not the original payout performance (designed payout performance) of the gaming machine is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on the gaming results". Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player plays the game. For this reason, the performance indicator 99 is not installed at a location visible to the player, but is mounted at an easily visible location inside the gaming machine, for example, on a control board or a board case protecting the same.

(2-2. Effect control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 includes a microprocessor 241 having a built-in CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) storing effect data required for effect control processing, and a RAM 243 (functioning as a work area and a buffer memory). Effect control RAM), a sound control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), a counter circuit for effect drawing random numbers, an interrupt controller circuit, a reset circuit, A WDT circuit or the like is provided, and controls the overall production operation. The RTC function unit is a clock IC that ticks the time, and relates to time information on a real time, that is, the current time (“current time, minute, and second”) and / or date (month, day, day of the week). Acts as a clock to provide calendar information. The RTC function unit includes a secondary battery, and can be permanently operated by charging the secondary battery with a power supply voltage supplied from a power supply board. Even if it is, it keeps clocking the current date and time. However, in the RTC function unit, there may be a difference in the time measured with the passage of time due to a difference in the frequency of the internal transmitter. Therefore, accurate time information can be provided by adjusting the time of the RTC function unit based on accurate time information provided by the time adjusting means from outside the gaming machine.

  The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are reception of an effect control command from the main control unit 20, selection of an effect based on the effect control command, image display control of a liquid crystal display device 36 as effect means, sound control of a speaker 46. And light emission control of various effect LEDs (decoration lamp 45, button LED 13b, and other effect LEDs), operation control of various movable objects, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 36. The display control unit includes a VDP that controls overall image output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP that performs development. (Video RAM) for temporarily storing the obtained image data, a liquid crystal control CPU for outputting control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, a program describing a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU, and a program and the like. It mainly includes a liquid crystal control ROM for storing various data necessary for display control, and a liquid crystal control RAM serving as a work area and a buffer memory.

  In addition, the effect control unit 24 includes various effect LEDs such as the decorative lamp 45 and the button LEDs 13b and 62a in order to present various effects (light effects, sound effects, and movable body effects with movable bodies). An optical display control unit for the optical display device 45a, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, and movable body part motors 80c, 62c, 73c for operating the first to third movable body parts , A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) and the like. The effect control unit 24 is capable of transmitting control signals relating to effect means to these control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a for monitoring the operation of the movable body object, and the effect control unit 24 performs a current operation of the movable body The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Also, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction of the movable body object is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, a predetermined error is notified.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to an effect button switch 13a for detecting operation of the effect button 13 and directional key switches 75a 'to 75d' for detecting operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d). The unit 24 can receive operation detection signals from the effect buttons 13 (13A, 66, 70) and the direction keys 75.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, based on information included in the command, the effect control unit 24 determines one of a plurality of effect patterns prepared in advance by lottery or uniquely. Then, it controls various effect means at a necessary timing to make a desired effect appear. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting / blinking drive of the decoration lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative patterns) The “variation display operation, the announcement effect, and the like” are developed in chronological order, thereby realizing the “effect scenario” in a broad sense. Further, during the predetermined operation reception valid period, the effect control unit 24 determines which one of the effect buttons 13 and / or the direction keys 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a 'to 75d'. It is configured to be able to identify whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, continuous hitting, etc.) (operation identifying means), and it is possible to control the appearance according to the operation mode.

  The effect control command defines a function with a 2-byte configuration including a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT). Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When transmitting this information as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and performs the first time after a lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. Is transmitted. Further, event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and a second transmission of the strobe signal is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the setting. The strobe signal is controlled to the active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing by generating an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal so that the effect control command is acquired in the interrupt processing. Has become. Also, unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed). Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a game operation of the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special design change display game, decorative design change display game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, when the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, the main controller 20 "Big hit lottery" is performed by random number lottery. The main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b based on the lottery result and starts the special symbol variation display game. The display is displayed on the device, and the special symbol change display game is thereby terminated.

  Here, in this embodiment, the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the upper starting port 34 and the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, on condition that a game ball has entered the upper starting port 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed to start the first special symbol variability display game, On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on condition that a game ball has entered the lower starting port 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed to start the second special symbol variance display game. ing. Then, when the special symbol change display game is started on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b, after a predetermined change display time has elapsed, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, when the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode when the result is "small hit", and otherwise in the predetermined "losing" mode. As a result, a game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol change display game on the special symbol display device 38a is referred to as “special symbol change display game 1”, and the second special symbol change display game 38b on the special symbol display device 38b side. Is referred to as a "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbols" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbols"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbols". The variable display game 2 "may be referred to as a" special symbol variable display game ".

  When the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbols (direct game symbols) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 in a variable manner, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started. And various effects are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating a jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol change display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning decorative symbol change display game including the decorative symbol change display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol change display game (the result of the jackpot lottery) is “big hit”, an effect reflecting the result is developed in the decorative symbol change display game. When the special symbol display device is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol indicates a big hit (for example, the display state of 7-segment is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In each display area, the decorative pattern reflects the "big hit" (for example, in each display area of "left", "middle" and "right", three decorative patterns are "7", "7" and "7" 7) is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol change display game is ended, and accordingly, the decorative symbol change display game is ended, and as a result, the symbol mode of "big hit" is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the special winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the special winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the normal state (normal game) A special game state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the state) occurs. In this jackpot game, the opening time of the special winning opening by the opening door 52b is continued until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: for example, 29.8 seconds) elapses, or the number of game balls winning the special winning opening (the special winning opening 50). (The maximum number of winning balls (maximum winning number): for example, 10) that is allowed for the winning opening which is opened or enlarged by one operation of the accessory. Until the winning area is opened or expanded, and if any of these conditions (round game ending condition) is satisfied, the big winning opening is closed (closing condition is satisfied), The predetermined number of rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds) are repeated. In other words, the opening pattern of the special winning opening has one or more unit opening periods, and the unit opening period starts by opening the special winning opening, and at least the number of winnings to the special winning opening is a predetermined number (maximum winning number). Is controlled so as to close the large winning opening that is being opened based on reaching the maximum winning. The hit game in which the unit opening period is continuously executed two or more times is a case of a big hit game in which the accessory continuous operation device operates. In the hit game in which the unit opening period is executed once, the round game is executed. This is the case of a small hit game that is not performed.

  When the big hit game starts, an opening effect is performed using the big hit start interval time, and after the opening effect ends, a round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. When the prescribed number of rounds ends, an ending effect is performed using the big hit end interval time. Thereby, the big hit game ends. That is, the big hit game is roughly divided into an opening period, a round game period with the maximum number of rounds being an upper limit, and an ending period. During the round game, an effect during the round is displayed, and during the round game, an interval effect between the rounds is displayed.

  Regarding the information necessary for executing the above decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 determines, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35 (winning), specifically, On the condition that a game ball is detected by the upper starting port sensor 34a or the lower starting port sensor 35a and a starting condition (a starting condition relating to a special symbol) is established, a "big hit", "small hit", or "losing" If it is "big hit", the big hit type is determined.If it is "small hit", the small hit type is determined. Perform a jackpot lottery including 'Symbol lottery (winning type lottery)' for losing the type. Can be), Based on the lottery result information to determine variation pattern and of the special symbols, and finally a special symbol to stop displaying the (special stop symbol). Then, as a production control command for specifying the processing state, the production control unit 24 includes a “variation pattern designation command” including at least fluctuation pattern information of a special symbol (for example, information on a jackpot lottery result and information on the fluctuation time of the special symbol). Send to the side. Thereby, the basic information required for the decorative symbol change display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, a “decorative symbol designating command” including information on a special stop symbol (symbol lottery result information (information on a hit type)) is also transmitted to the effect controller 24 in order to enrich the effect variations. It has become.

  The fluctuation pattern information of the special symbol can include information designating occurrence of a specific notice effect (for example, a reach effect type described later, a pseudo continuous effect and the number of times). In detail, the variation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a “hit variation pattern” in the case of a hit and a “loss variation pattern” in the case of a loss according to a jackpot lottery result. 'Reach fluctuation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of reach effects (including designation of N reach 1-2 and weak SP reach-strong reach types described below), 'Normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify occurrence of reach effects, There are multiple types of variation patterns, such as a 'reach variation pattern with pseudo-sequence' that specifies the occurrence of the production and the reach effect, and a 'normal variation pattern with the pseudo-sequence with the occurrence of the pseudo-sequence and no occurrence of the reach effect. included. In addition, for the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-continuation variation pattern, a variation time longer than the variation time of the normal variation pattern is basically set in order to secure the production time of the notice effect.

  The effect control unit 24 performs a time-series operation during the decorative design change display game based on information included in the effect control commands (here, the change pattern designating command and the decorative design designating command) sent from the main control unit 20. And the decorative design (decorative stop design) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined according to the time schedule based on the special design change pattern. Appearance control of the variable display effect of the decorative pattern is performed. In this manner, the decorative symbols on the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronization with the display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time, and during the period of the special symbol variable display game and during the decorative symbol variable display game. Is substantially the same time width. The effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative design change display game. Thereby, reproduction of an image (image effect), reproduction of a sound effect (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive of an effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 (light effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36 are realized.

  As described above, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the one reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is to be expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. The two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal design fluctuation display game)
In the gaming machine 1, the main control unit 20 performs a random number lottery based on the fact that a game ball has passed (wins) the normal symbol starting port 37. Based on this lottery result, the ordinary symbol represented by the LED is displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 39a in a variable manner, and the normal symbol variation display game is started. Stop display is performed in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “assistant hit”, the display section of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state).

  When the "assistant hit" occurs, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 is opened. Alternatively, the game ball is enlarged to be in a state where the game ball easily flows in (starting port opened state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as “open electric game”) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general-purpose opening game, the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (the operating time during which the lower starting port 35 is opened by the movable wing piece 47) is set by the movable wing piece 47 of the normal fluctuation winning device 41 for a predetermined time (for example, Until 0.2 seconds have elapsed, or until the number of game balls winning the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, four), the winning area is opened or expanded, and any one of these conditions is satisfied. In such a case, the operation of closing the lower starting port 35 is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, up to two times).

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the ordinary symbol variation display game, during the jackpot game, or during the open-destination game, a prize is won in each of the opening ports 34 to 35 or the ordinary symbol startup port 37. If this occurs, that is, if a detection signal is input from the start-up opening sensors 34a to 35a or the normal design start-up opening sensor 37a and the corresponding start-up condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is changed to the start right of the variable display game. Are stored up to a maximum upper limit storage number (for example, a maximum of four), which is a predetermined upper limit value, excluding data related to variable display. On-hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol change display operation and game balls related to the on-hold data are also referred to as “operation-hold balls”. In order to clarify the number of the operation reserve balls to the player, a reserve display (not shown) provided at an appropriate place of the gaming machine 1 or a reserve display provided as an icon image on a screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Light up the display.

  In the present embodiment, up to four operation-holding balls for the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 at the maximum, and are held as the number of times the special symbol or the normal symbol is changed. In addition, the maximum storage number (maximum reserved storage number) of each operation reserved ball number regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or a part of the maximum reserved storage number of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the game property. In the following, each of the special design 1, special design 2, and normal design operation reserve balls are also referred to as special figure 1 operation reserve ball, special figure 2 operation reserve ball, and general figure operation reserve ball, respectively.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. To facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various game states will be described.

  The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “probability changing function (probability changing function)” in which the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) plays a functional part. There are two types of functions, a probable change function relating to a special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "special design probable change function") and a probable change function relating to a normal design (hereinafter, referred to as a "normal design probable change function").

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/32), and is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function for generating a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)". Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability changing function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a high probability, so that a big hit is easily generated.

  The ordinary symbol probability changing function changes the lottery probability per assistance from a low probability (for example, 2/256) which is a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 255/255), and is more advantageous than the normal state. This is a function to generate a “probable change in auxiliary hit” state. In the game state in which the normal symbol probability changing function is in operation (probability change status per assist), since the probability of a lottery per assist is in a high probability state, an assist hit is likely to be generated, and a general power opening game frequently occurs. In this state, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 per unit time is higher than that in the normal state.

  Further, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variation time reduction function (time reduction function)” in which the main control unit 20 functions as a functional unit. There are two types of time-saving functions related to special symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "special symbol time-saving functions") and time-saving functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter, referred to as "normal symbol time-saving functions").

  The special symbol time saving function generates a "special symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol variation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. In the game state (special symbol time reduction state) in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is reduced (for example, the average required for the loss variation without reach). (The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds.), And the lottery frequency is improved in which the number of jackpots per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

  The normal symbol time-saving function generates a "normal symbol time-saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. In the game state in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated (ordinary symbol time saving state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is reduced (for example, from 30 seconds to 1 second). ), The lottery number per assist per unit time is higher than in the normal state.

  Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 functions as a functional unit. The opening extension function is a function of generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) is extended from the normal state. In the open extension state, the opening operation period of the movable wing piece 47 (starting port open state time) is extended, for example, from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, one time (open extension function). Is extended two times (when the opening extension function is activated) from twice (when the opening extension function is activated), so that the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved from the normal state. Therefore, when the opening extension function is activated, the winning frequency to the lower starting port 35 is increased. Therefore, as a gaming state, the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game that derives the jackpot lottery result is more satisfied than the normal state. In this respect, the open extended state is also referred to as an “electric chew support state” in that the extended open state is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with a state in which the open extended function is not activated (inactive).

  By activating one or more types of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the game state in which the special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time saving function, and opening extension function operate is referred to as `` probable variation state '', and from among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and a game state in which at least the special symbol probability changing function operates and the opening extension function does not operate (in this embodiment, the game state in which only the special symbol probability changing function operates) ) Is referred to as a “latent state”, and a state in which all functions are not operating (not operating) is referred to as a “normal state”. Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these game states, when the game state is the “time saving state” or “normal state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state (normal probability)”, and the game state becomes In the case of the "latent state" or the "probable state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "high probability state". In addition, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all of the above functions are not operated, and basically, under the same game state as the above normal state To be placed.

  Regarding each of the above-mentioned gaming states, if attention is paid to the presence or absence of the electric-chu support state, if the gaming state is “normal state” or “latent state”, there is no electric-chu support state (hereinafter, “electric-support-less state” ), And when the gaming state is the “time saving state” or the “probable change state”, the state is “the electric-chu support state is present (hereinafter, referred to as“ the electric-support ”state)”. In the case of the present embodiment, in the probability change state and the time saving state with the electric tuner support state, since the ordinary symbol change function, the ordinary symbol time reduction function, and the opening extension function are simultaneously operated, the occurrence of the ordinary electricity opening game is facilitated, The game state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved.

  Regarding the operation status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability changing function, ordinary symbol time saving function, and opening extension function) that determine the gaming state, the main control unit 20 side determines the operation status of these functions. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. Also, what kind of gaming state the current gaming state is is managed using an identifier “gaming state number YJ”. For example, when the game state number YJ is “00H”, it is “normal state”, when it is “01H”, it is “time saving state”, when it is “02H”, it is “latent state”, and when it is “03H”, it is “probable state”. '. Note that a game state focusing on the operation state of each function is also referred to as an “internal game state”.

<4. About hits>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, "hit" of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type and hit game)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hits, such as "big hits 1 to 11" and small hits 1, are provided as hit types of the jackpot lottery target as shown in the drawing. Among these hits, the big hits 1 to 11 are hits belonging to a big hit type which is an operation trigger of the condition device, and the small hits 1 are hits which belong to a small hit type which is not a trigger of the operation of the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of a continuous operation device for a role (a device for continuously operating a special electric role) for performing a round game. A combination of symbols is displayed, or a game ball is activated when a game ball passes through a specific area in the special winning opening (excluding a winning combination during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device).

  Therefore, when the small hit is won, the continuous action device for actors does not operate, and a round game like a big hit is not executed. However, the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening can be controlled in the same or very similar or completely different operation mode as the round game by the big hit. In other words, an apparent round game (pseudo round game) can be executed. Similar to the big hit, such a small hit is simply a "losing" in that it is a winning type which is an opportunity (occurrence) of transition to a winning game (special game state) accompanied by opening / closing operation of a winning port. Is different. Note that the small hit 1 is a hit belonging to the “small hit type”, but is treated in the same row as one of the big hit types without being distinguished from the above-mentioned big hit unless it is particularly necessary for convenience of explanation.

  The notation of "16R", "8R", "4R", and "2R" in the big hits 1 to 11 in the column of "hit content" in FIG. . The notation “Long Open” in the same column indicates that the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one round game is likely to reach the maximum winning number (9) in the large winning opening. Opening time (for example, 29.8 seconds) "indicates a big hit, and" short opening "means" short opening time (for example, short opening time) in which the maximum opening time of the winning opening is shorter than "long opening" 1.8 seconds). "

  The opening pattern of the special winning opening can be opened according to one or more types of opening patterns (the same applies to the case of a small hit). The notations of “probable change”, “time saving”, and “latent” are the probable change jackpot that triggers the transition to the probable state, the time saving jackpot that triggers the transition to the time reduction state, and the latency that triggers the transition to the latent state. Indicates a big hit. For example, if the big hit 1 is “12R long opening probable big hit”, it is a big hit of a chance of transition to the probable change, the maximum number of rounds is 12R, and the big winning opening of each round game is opened and closed in a long open pattern. Indicates that The profit state during the jackpot game is higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening is higher in the long opening than in the short opening.

(4-2. About the transfer destination game state after the hit game)
In addition, FIG. 4 shows the destination of the game state after the end of the big hit game according to the game state at the time of winning when each big hit is won. Referring to FIG. 4, when the big hits 1, 3, 5, 8, and 10 are won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the winning, the “probable change state (high probability, with electric support)” Is transferred. In other words, the big hits 1, 3, 5, 8, and 10 are all big hits that trigger the transition to the probable change state (high probability / with power support). In addition, when the big hits 2, 4, and 9 are won, the game shifts to “time saving A (100 times of time savings)”. Is to be done. In other words, the big hits 2, 4, 6, 9, and 11 are all big hits that trigger the transition to the time-saving state (low probability, with power support). In addition, when the big hit 7 is won, if the gaming state at the time of the winning is the normal state, the state is shifted to the “probable state (high probability, no power support)”, and if the latent state, the time saving state, or the probable change state. The state is shifted to the “probable change state”.

  Regarding the “latent state”, the “probable change state”, and the “time saving state” according to the present embodiment, the number of times of execution of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol) is continued until the predetermined specified number of times ends, If the special symbol change display game is completed without winning a big hit (except for a small hit that does not trigger a shift of the internal game state) within the specified number of times, the game is shifted to a normal state (normal game state) from the next game. It has become so. In the case of the present embodiment, the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total number of variation of the special symbols 1 and 2) is counted as the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game.

  Regarding the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, 65536 times are set as the predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as “ST number”) in the latent state or the probable change state. The number of STs is almost certainly maintained in the high probability state until the next big hit is won due to the big hit winning probability (for example, the big hit probability during the probability change, setting 1-6 = 1/41 to 1/32). It is the number of times that can be done. Of course, the ST count may be set to an appropriate value (for example, the ST count = approximately 33) in order to set the continuation rate of the high-probability state to an appropriate extended rate (for example, a continuation rate of about 65%). Then, the high probability state may be maintained 100% until the next big hit is won (the number of STs may be infinite).

  The condition for shifting to the latent state or the probable change state may be determined as follows. A specific area is provided in the special winning opening 50, and when a specific big hit (for example, one big hit or three big hits) is won, a game ball can be passed through the specific area (in other big hits, the specific area is specified). Make passage difficult or impossible). Then, only when the game ball passes through this specific area, the so-called "V-variable type" model which activates the special symbol probability changing function and shifts to the probability variation state or the latent state depending on the type of big hit may be used. . In addition, during the probable change state, a so-called “fall lottery type” model may be used in which each game performs a shift lottery (falling lottery) from a high probability to a low probability.

  As for the time reduction state, in the case of the time reduction A, the number of times of time reduction is set 100, and in the case of the time reduction B, the number of times of time reduction 50 is set. The time savings A and B may be the same number of times (for example, 70 times).

(About winning a small hit)
Next, a game state after the small hit game will be described. When a small hit is won, the gaming state (internal gaming state) at the time of the small hit winning is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal game state due to the small hit winning is not performed. For this reason, the internal gaming state at the time of the small hit winning and the internal gaming state after the small hitting game are both the same internal gaming state. For example, when the small hit 1 is won during the normal state, the normal state is continued during and after the hit game. In this respect, the character differs from the above-mentioned "big hit" in which the transition control of the internal game state is performed. Further, the closing condition of the special winning opening 50 during the small hitting game is, as in the case of the big hit, until the opening time of the special winning opening elapses a predetermined time or reaches the maximum winning number. Utilizing such a property, in the present embodiment, the following game operation control is performed when a small hit 1 or a big hit 7 (2R short open latency) is won in the normal state. The hit game with the small hit 1 (small hit game) is controlled so as to have substantially the same operation mode as the hit game with the big hit 7 (2R short open latency) (a pseudo 2R big hit game is executed). : Pseudo 2R short opening), and the effect during the hit also produces substantially the same effect, and after these hit games, the same effect mode (CZ effect mode described later) is entered. As a result, even when the small hit 1 is won, it is possible to apparently dress as if the big hit 7 has been won (the type of the hit hit is concealed). As a result, even when the small hit is won, the player can be provided with a sense of expectation of entering the high-probability state, "it may have shifted to the latent state".

  In the present embodiment, in both the case where the "small hit 1" and the "big hit 7" are won in the normal state, the high probability state is set for a predetermined game period (for example, until the number of times the special symbol is changed four times). As a performance mode that excites a sense of expectation of entry into the game, a transition is made to the same chance production mode (CZ production mode). This CZ effect mode works as an effect mode that excites the expectation of a high probability state. Note that the substance of the CZ effect mode shifted to when the small hit 1 is won is “CZ (normal)” in which the game state is “normal state”, and the CZ effect mode is shifted to when the big hit 7 is won. Is "CZ (subtle)" in the gaming state "probable state".

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for performing effects related to the game state, and is configured to be able to control transition between each effect mode in response to the transition of the game state. I have. The production mode includes a “normal production mode” according to the “normal state”, a “CZ production mode” according to the “CZ”, a “probability production mode” according to the “probable state”, and a “probable variation state” according to the “probable state”. There are provided a plurality of types of effect modes according to each game state, such as a "probable change effect mode", a "time-saving effect mode" relating to a "time reduction state", and a "hit game effect mode" relating to a "hit game state". In the “normal C effect mode” corresponding to the above “CZ”, the current big hit lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret in the effect, and an effect that excites the player with the expectation of the high probability state is performed. It plays the role of "secret production mode". In the time reduction effect mode, a common time reduction effect mode may be provided for the time reduction A and the time reduction B, or may be different.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The production control unit 24 designates a specific production control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, specifies the current game state or specifies that the game state is shifted. Based on the effect control command, the main control unit 20 is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of effect modes while maintaining consistency with the game state. Such specific effect control commands include a fluctuation pattern designation command, a game state designation command, a customer waiting command, a specification designation command, and a command transmitted during a hit (a big hit start command and a big hit end command described later), and the like. There is. The effect control unit 24 has a function unit (effect state management means) for managing an effect mode related to a game state, and manages a current effect mode.

  In each of the effect modes, a background display (hereinafter, “background”) as a background of the decorative design variation display screen is provided so that the player can grasp the state of the effect corresponding to the game mode. For example, under the “normal effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background effect displaying a cherry tree background image), and under the “time reduction effect mode”, the season “summer” (For example, a background effect that displays a background image of the sea). Under the “probable effect mode”, a background effect that reminds of the season “autumn” (for example, a background effect that displays a background image of autumnal trees). , Under "Sensitivity effect mode", switch to background displays related to the game state, such as background effects reminiscent of the season "winter" (for example, background effects displaying a background image of a snowy mountain). It is controlled. Note that different background effects can be made to appear even in the same effect mode. For example, a plurality of types of normal effect modes, such as a normal A effect mode as a background image A, a normal B effect mode as a background image B, and a normal C effect mode as a background image C, are provided in the normal effect mode. An effect corresponding to the effect mode can be made to appear. By utilizing this, a morning background change notice to be described later is realized.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the announcement effect will be described. The effect control unit 24 includes the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (in the present embodiment, the “variation pattern designation command” and / or “ Based on the information included in the "decorative design designation command", various "announcement effects" related to the jackpot lottery results can be controlled (announcement effect control means). Such a notice effect may include an expectation of whether or not the hit type has been won (a well-known “win expectation”), and / or a predetermined event (for example, a hit, a hit of a specific hit, another notice effect). Occurrence, etc.), and acts as a “promotion effect” to foster the player's expectation of winning. Representative announcements include, in addition to "reach production", "pseudo-sequential production" described later, etc., and various announcement productions that accompany these productions or that occur independently are provided. . Hereinafter, these production modes will be described.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode involving a reach state, and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. This “reach state” is a display mode in which, before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived, some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the course of the decorative symbol variation display game indicate a winning. In a state in which a part of the decorative pattern is partially displayed, it indicates a so-called "listening tile state" of a display mode in which a decorative pattern that is not yet derived and displayed is displayed in a variable manner. For example, on a predetermined winning effective line, a part of a decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed for a part of a winning symbol (for example, a symbol matching such as “777”) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol are “7”). Is displayed, and the other decorative symbols (in this case, the middle symbol that does not form the listening tile (reach symbol)) stop and swing for a predetermined time. A typical example is a state in which the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed while moving, scaling, or deforming. Therefore, just because the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol change display game does not always become “big hit”, and the finally derived result is a hit symbol (for example, “777” of the hit symbol). If not, the game result of this time is “losing”.

  The reach state is not limited to the one accompanied by the left and right listening tile display using the left symbol and the right symbol (“7 ↓ 7”) as in the case described above. For example, display states such as a 左 left middle listening tile ’with a left middle right decorative pattern of“ 77 ↓ ”and a‘ middle right listening tile ’with a“ ↓ 77 ”can also be treated as a reach state. In addition, when the hit symbols are not the same, for example, when the hit symbol is “357” or the like, similarly, the decorative pattern on the middle left is “3 ↓ 7” (left and right listening tiles) and “35 ↓” (left middle listening tile). ), The variable display state of “↓ 57” (middle right tile) can be treated as the tile state. Note that a display mode such as “sudden alignment” in which a decorative symbol suddenly hits and displays a symbol is different from the reach state (listening state) here. The reach effect involves such a display of the reach state. If the reach effect appears (appears), the winning expectation is relatively higher than the normal fluctuation.

  The reach effect includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the winning expectation. For example, in some cases, the winning expectation is relatively higher than when N reach (normal reach) appears. Such a reach production is called “SP reach (super reach)”. Many of the “SP reach” have a relatively longer production time (fluctuation time) than the N reach in order to increase a player's expectation of winning. The N reach of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of N reach such as “N reach 1 to 2”, and the SP reach includes a plurality of types of SP reach such as “weak SP reach, medium SP reach, and strong SP reach”. Is included. In addition, regarding the relationship of the winning expectation degree between the same kind, the relations of “N reach 1 <N reach 2” and “weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach” are given. The following relationship is established: reach 1 <N reach 2 <weak SP reach <medium SP reach <strong SP reach. Note that the actual jackpot expectation degree changes depending on whether or not another notice effect appears. For this reason, for example, even when a weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high winning expectation is involved, the winning expectation may be equal to or higher than the medium SP reach. The SP reach includes an extended SP reach (SPSP reach) that evolves from one SP reach to another SP reach. This SPSP reach has the highest expectation among SP reach and belongs to the strong SP reach type.

  In the present embodiment, when the game result is a hit, in the process of deriving and displaying the hit symbol, the reach effect is basically passed through. For this reason, the presence or absence of the reach effect is a clue for the player to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, in a stage before the reach effect is generated, various notice effects are provided for giving a notice (suggestion) of the possibility of the reach effect (including occurrence determination). However, the notice effect does not necessarily indicate the possibility of the reach effect, but also indicates the possibility of another notice effect other than the reach effect (including the setting suggestion effect described later), or the reach effect. Some of them occur in combination. In such a notice effect, one or more kinds of notice effects may occur in a complex manner during one symbol change display game (during one change) in connection with the jackpot lottery result, and the notice effect is combined. When this occurs, a clearer winning expectation degree is indicated. For example, if a plurality of types of announcement effects with a high winning expectation occur (including a case where they occur redundantly (simultaneously) and a case where they occur at different timings), the winning expectation will be further increased. Such a notice effect in a game formed by the notice effect and the reach effect can improve the fun of the game.

(5-2-2. Pseudo continuous production (pseudo consecutive))
The “pseudo-run” refers to an effect mode with a pseudo-continuously-fluctuating display state of a decorative symbol (so-called “pseudo-fluctuation”). The “pseudo-fluctuation” refers to a display operation in which, during the decorative symbol variation display game, a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol re-variable display operation is executed from the temporary stop state. It refers to a variable display mode that is repeated once or multiple times. During the temporary stop state, for example, a decorative pattern in which the decorative symbol is not completely stopped but is displayed in small increments in the vertical or horizontal direction is a typical example. This is different from the later described “read ahead notice effect” which can be developed over a plurality of symbol change display games. Basically, the occurrence rate of such a “pseudo-run” is determined so that the greater the number of pseudo-changes, the higher the expectation of hitting. The degree of expectation of a notice effect (for example, SP reach) having a high degree of expectation is increased.

  Therefore, in the case of an effect scenario including a reach effect, the “pseudo ream” is generated at a stage before the reach state is formed (a stage prior to the reach effect). As a notice that there is a possibility that a specific reach type may occur, one or more pseudo fluctuations are performed, and after the pseudo fluctuation ends, the final game result is reached via a reach state (reach effect). Is derived and displayed. Also, in the case of an effect scenario that does not include the reach effect (in the case of an effect mode based on the normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-runs), after the pseudo fluctuation ends, the state does not pass through the reach state (reach effect), that is, the normal fluctuation. Is executed and the final game result is derived and displayed. Here, the fluctuation display operation executed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “final fluctuation”. For example, in the case of going through the reach state, the reach effect is executed by the main fluctuation and the final The game result is derived and displayed. When the game does not go through the reach state, the normal fluctuation is executed in the main fluctuation, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present embodiment, the expression “pseudo N times (N = 2, 3, 4)” means a series of variable display operations including the pseudo run and the main fluctuation. For example, in the case of writing "two pseudo consecutive times + SP reach", "one pseudo fluctuation + SP reach of main fluctuation" (the number of fluctuation display operations is two times), that is, SP reach is executed after one pseudo fluctuation Means In the case of the above “SPSP reach”, a pseudo run may occur before the reach state of the SP reach of the final development destination is formed. That is, the pseudo fluctuation may be executed after the first SP reach. In any case, the maximum number of pseudo runs is "3" in this embodiment (see the column of "pseudo runs" in FIG. 43).

(5-2-3. Player Participation Type Production)
The “player participation type effect” is an effect mode belonging to a so-called “button notice effect”, in which the player can change the contents of the effect based on a predetermined operation on the effect button 13 (operation means). This is a production mode. In the player participation type effect, when a predetermined button valid period is reached, an operation instruction effect for instructing a predetermined operation to the operation means (the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75) appears, and during the button valid period. In response to the operation of the operating means, the present effect is changed to another effect (effect at the time of operation), and the expected degree of winning is announced in accordance with the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. For example, typical object display and character display change in response to button operation, special sound effects and light effects are generated, and story-like effect scenarios progress (so-called conversational effects, etc.). is there.

(5-2-4. Background change notice effect (background change notice effect))
The “background change notice effect” means that one background image is changed (shifted) to another background image based on a predetermined shift condition, and the winning expectation is notified (depending on the background image type after the change). (Indicated). However, the background change notice is an effect mode in which the background display changes as the notice effect, unlike the background effect according to the effect mode described above. For example, a part of the currently displayed background image or the entire background image changes, and the background image after the change indicates the winning expectation. Specifically, when the current mode is the normal effect mode, the cherry tree, which is a part of the background image (specific object display), is changed to rape blossoms (high expectation) or Kohei Kama (low expectation) according to the expected degree of winning. ), Or from a normal daytime background image to a nighttime background image (high expected degree) for advance notice. In the present embodiment, at the start of the symbol variation display game, a cut-in image expressing a flower (corolla) is generated (a specific sound effect and / or a light effect may be additionally generated), As a result, the background display changes. In addition, as one of the background change announcement effects, it may appear as one mode of a setting suggestion effect of suggesting a setting in accordance with the type of background effect.

(5-2-5. Pre-reading notice production)
"Pre-reading notice effect" refers to an operation-holding ball (unexecuted operation-holding ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which an effect in the symbol change display game executed first in a series is used to notify in advance of a winning expectation degree of the operation-pending ball in advance.

  The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment, including the prefetch notice effect, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

  In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative pattern in the drawing), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of special pattern 1 operation reserve balls and the number of special figure 2 operation reserve balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 is provided to indicate whether or not there is an operation-holding ball, indicating whether the operation-holding ball is present or not (with operation-holding ball: “作 動 (white circle)” in the figure) or off (without operation-holding ball: Information on the current number of operation-reserved balls is reported by a dotted circle in the drawing).

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation-holding ball (hereinafter, referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order). It is displayed as the first operation-holding ball (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the operation-holding balls in the hold display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the holding display sections a1 to d1 (holding icons (icon images)) provided on a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (four) as the maximum holding storage number. Special symbol 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. Further, on the left side of the suspension display areas 76 and 77, a fluctuation display area 78 for indicating the operation suspension ball currently provided for the special symbol variation display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured such that an image in which the icon of the game execution suspension K currently provided for the game appears on the icon of the seat J is displayed. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is replaced with the game execution hold K. The icon is moved over the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

  When an operation-holding ball is generated, as the effect control command, the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the pre-read determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball generated this time). An identifiable “hold addition command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 20 described later).

  Specifically, the pre-reading determination information includes a jackpot lottery result (the jackpot lottery result at the start of the change) executed by the main control unit 20 when the operation-holding ball is provided in the symbol change display game, This refers to game information relating to a prefetch variation pattern obtained when the variation pattern at the start is determined in advance. Therefore, the pre-reading determination information includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading omission result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and additionally, the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result, and the fluctuation. It is possible to include information on a prefetch determination result (prefetch fluctuation pattern) regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start. What kind of information including the hold addition command is sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to what kind of advance notice content to be notified. For example, the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the look-ahead determination at the time of occurrence of the operation pending ball does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of the variation” itself obtained when the operation pending ball is subjected to the variation display operation. . For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which “N-reach 1” is designated at the start of the variation, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach “N-reach 1” itself, but the outline of “N-reach”. Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2) ".

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the look-ahead determination information included in the command, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect control process related to the “prefetch notice effect” as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed to determine whether or not a look-ahead notice effect can be executed. Make a pre-reading announcement effect according to the expected degree of winning. The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-read notice lottery is higher for the "big hit" than for the "losing" and for the reach type having a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, the degree of expectation of winning in the hit type is indicated depending on whether or not a prefetch notice effect is generated.

  In this embodiment, when the pre-fetch notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the prefetch notice is, for example, a normal hold display (normal Preliminary advance notice of "hold display change system" that changes from white in the hold display mode) to a special hold color or color hold display (special hold display mode) such as blue, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow of the advance notice display An effect (preliminary change notice) is performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched operation holding ball of the holding display section b1 is changed to a special holding display. Here, the display of the hold icon in blue, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is high in the order of the colors. ) The icon is a premium icon (reservation notice). Therefore, this suspension display unit functions as suspension display means for displaying the number of operation suspensions, but when executing a prefetch notice effect, a corresponding one of the suspension display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is displayed. The hold display mode is changed to a predetermined look-ahead advance display mode (special hold display mode), thereby serving as a look-ahead advance notice control means for controlling the appearance of the look-ahead advance announcement effect.

  The existing operation pending balls are sequentially consumed when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to indicate that one operation-holding ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display section corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved up (shifted to the left side in order), and a display such that the number of the display balls is reduced is displayed. Although the control (shift display) is performed, the above-described special hold display is continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display. Also, when the game holding K is placed on the seat J, basically the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation according to the present symbol variation display game is performed. The pre-reading notice display mode for the reserved ball is notified to the player even during the game. In the lower right corner of the LCD screen, as a display area for sub-effects (sub-effects) different from the main effect such as a decorative design or a notice effect, a sub-display area related to a special symbol or normal symbol variation display operation. 79 are provided.

(6. Production means)
Various effects in the gaming machine 1 are produced by the effect means provided in the gaming machine. Such a directing means may be a stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as visual, auditory, tactile, etc. ), A sound generating device (sound effect means) such as a speaker 46, an effect display device (display means) such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a pressurizing device for transmitting a contact pressure to an operator's body, and applying a wind pressure to a player's body. A wind pressure device or a movable body which exerts a visual effect by its operation is a typical example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye similarly to the image display device (image display means), but is different from the image display device in that it also includes an image display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term "image display device" refers to a type in which an effect (image display effect) is mainly displayed by image display, and a device that presents an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is based on the concept of the effect display device. Included in

<Process on Main Control Unit: FIGS. 6A to 29>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6A to 29, a game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the main control unit 20 side includes an infinite loop main processing (main control side main processing: FIGS. 6A and 6B) and a timer interrupt processing (main control side timer interrupt) started by a periodic interrupt from the CTC. Processing: FIG. 16).

<6. Main Control Side Main Processing: FIGS. 6A and 6B>
With reference to FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, a main process (main control side main process) on the main control unit 20 side will be described.

  6A and 6B are flowcharts showing details of the main control-side main processing. Hereinafter, in the description of the main control-side main processing, processing closely related to the present invention will be described with reference to source codes (in some cases, also referred to as “programs”) shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B. However, FIGS. 26A and 26B illustrate a part of the source code of the main processing on the main control side described in the order of storage in the memory, and an arrow on the right side of the description column of the source code. Are various types of operations executed in accordance with combinations of input states (ON / OFF states) of the setting key switch 94, the door opening sensor 61, and the RAM clear switch 98 (setting key switch signal, door opening signal, RAM clear switch signal). The processing routes (the “setting change processing route”, the “RAM clearing process route”, the “setting confirmation process route”, the “backup restoration process route”, and the “re-power-on waiting process (RAM error process) route”) are described below. The processing contents executed in the processing route and the execution order of the processing are shown corresponding to the source code. In each of the processing routes, the processing of step S011 to step S014, which will be described later, is executed in common. The processing is branched (conditional branch).

  At the start of the main control side main processing, when a system reset occurs at the time of recovery from a power failure state or power supply abnormality, or when a control program runs away, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exercised and the CPU is activated. For example, there is a case where a reset is performed forcibly (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control-side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) first executes an initialization process necessary for starting a game operation as a part of a power-on process (step S011). ).

(7. Initial setting process: FIG. 7)
First, the initial setting process in step S011 will be described with reference to the initial setting process columns (SPa1 to SPa26) in FIG. 7 and FIG. 26A. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing details of the initial setting process.

  In FIG. 7, when a system reset or a WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state as an initial setting at the time of startup (step S051, SPa1).

  Next, the stack pointer SP is set (step S052). Here, 00FFH is set (set) in the stack pointer SP (SPa2). As a result, the area below the address 00FEH in the RAM 203 is set as the stack area for the program in the area, and the area below the address 01FEH is set as the stack area for the program outside the area (see FIG. 24).

  Next, the protection and the prohibited area of the RAM are invalidated in preparation for the use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check processing (_VDDCHK) described later (step S053, SPa3). The RAM protection is a function for preventing rewriting of the RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of the RAM protection is as follows. After a system reset or a WDT reset at the time of power recovery or the like, the protection of the RAM is enabled (RAM protected state). When the RAM protection is set to valid, data can be read from the RAM, but data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to the RAM, it is necessary to invalidate the protection of the RAM. In the present embodiment, the validity / invalidity of the RAM protect and the RAM access prohibited area is controlled according to the value of the RAM protect register (RAMPT). If RAMPT = 00H, “RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect invalid”; if RAMPT = 01H, “RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect valid”; When the protection is invalid, and when the RAMPT is 81H, the RAM access prohibition area is valid, and the RAM protection is valid.

  Next, various setting processes at the time of turning on the power are executed (step S054). Here, in consideration of the possibility that the power supply was turned off / on during the setting change (for example, during the setting change management process in step S023 described later), first, the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs is considered. ) (WA = 0000H) (SPa4), utilizing the fact that the value of the WA register pair is zero, to output information for the security signal (fraud detection signal for external output) of the frame external terminal board 21 The external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) corresponding to the terminal is cleared to zero, and is used for setting ON / OFF of dynamic lighting data and a firing control signal (a firing permission signal ES by the payout control board 28) for the setting display 97. The LED common port (P_LEDCMN) and the LED common buffer (W_LEDCMN) are each cleared to zero (SPa ~SPa7). As a result, the security signal output port is temporarily cleared, and the setting indicator 97 is set to the unlit state. Further, it is possible to prevent the firing control signal from being set to the OFF state and to output a careless firing control signal.

  Next, a first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) is executed (step S055). Here, the first power supply abnormality check processing (_VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPa8). The “CALLV” instruction is a type of the CALL instruction. However, unlike the normal CALL instruction, the “CALLV” instruction is an instruction for executing a subroutine defined in a vector table (CALLV instruction vector table) in the CALL instruction vector area of the ROM 202. Has become. More specifically, a normal CALL instruction (CALL mn) is an instruction for executing a subroutine starting from an address (address mn) designated by an upper address and a lower address, whereas a CALLV instruction is an instruction for executing one address. Since the upper address constituting the section is specified as a specific value in the vector table, the address of the subroutine can be specified by specifying only the lower address, and the subroutine is called with a smaller amount of data than the CALL instruction. (A CALLV instruction is 1 byte, a normal CALL instruction is 3 bytes). For this reason, the CALLV instruction is suitable for executing a frequently used subroutine.

(8. First power failure check process: FIG. 8)
The first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing details of the first power supply abnormality check processing.

  In the first power supply abnormality check process, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S701), and then acquires input information of a power supply abnormality signal indicating a power interruption from the external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S702). . As shown, the 0th to 7th bits (b0 to b7) of the external signal input register (PINSTS) are such that the 0th bit (b0) is ON / OFF of the upper starting port sensor signal (upper starting port sensor 34a). The first bit (b1) indicates the ON / OFF state of the lower starting port sensor signal (lower starting port sensor 35a), and the second bit (b2) indicates the ON / OFF state of the power failure signal (voltage drop signal). And the third bit (b3) to the seventh bit (b7) are unused.

  If the power failure signal acquired in step S702 is in the ON state (b2 = 1) (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the first process (step S011) of the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Similarly, the processing after step S011 is sequentially executed. However, if the acquired power supply abnormality signal is not in the ON state (step S703: NO), it is determined that the operation is normal, the first power supply abnormality check processing is exited, and the internal function register initialization processing (step S056) of FIG. Transition.

  Returning to FIG. 7 again, when the power failure signal is not in the ON state, the internal function register initial setting process is executed (step S056, SPa9 to SPa13). Here, an initial setting process relating to the internal function register value of the CPU is performed including the components of the microcomputer. In D_REGINI1 shown in FIG. 26A, initial values related to various internal function register values inside the CPU are defined. For example, in addition to the RAM protect register, CTC, WDT, transmission / reception serial port, and interrupt mode (SPa9 to SPa13) are used. The internal function registers related to the interrupt mode 2), the interrupt priority, the internal hard random number, the internal soft random number, and the like are set to initial values.

  Next, processing of steps S057 to S062 is executed as processing for managing the activation waiting time of the sub-control board (production control unit 24). Specifically, first, as the above-described activation waiting time setting processing, the number of loops (for example, 240) is set in the B register (Step S057, SPa14), and the activation waiting count value (for example, 13880) is set in the WA register pair. Is set (step S058, SPa15).

  Then, as a process of subtracting the activation waiting time, the value of the WA register pair is decremented (step S059, SPa16), and the process waits until the value of the WA register pair becomes zero (step S060: NO, SPa17). Then, when the value of the register becomes zero (step S060: YES, SPa17), the first power supply abnormality check process of FIG. 8 is executed (step S061, SPa18). The processing of steps S059 to S062 is repeated until the number of loops becomes zero (step S063: NO, SPa19). As a result, the CPU 201 waits for the subsequent processing to be executed until the sub-control board starts up normally. The startup waiting time secured by the series of processes in steps S059 to S063 is set to about 2000 ms in consideration of the instruction cycle numbers of SPa10 to SPa15, the startup wait count value, the number of loops, and the CPU operating frequency. Is done.

  Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, at this stage, the main control-side timer interrupt process is not activated (the timer interrupt process is activated in step S036 described later). Therefore, since the timer value cannot be counted by the timer interrupt processing, a scheme has been devised to set a startup wait time using the number of instruction cycles, the count value for startup wait, the number of loops, the CPU operating frequency, and the like.

  If the startup waiting time has elapsed (step S063: YES (B = 0)), standby screen display command data (BA01H) is acquired (step S064, SPa20), and the acquired command data is shown in FIG. The command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (step S070) (step S065, SPa21). The command transmission process in step S065 is a subroutine (_CMDOUT) called and executed by a CALLV instruction as shown in FIG. 9 as shown in SPa21 of FIG. 26A. The processing is to transmit the 2-byte length effect control command data set in the DE register) to the effect control unit 24 (SPa20 to SPa21, step S070). The command transmission process (_CMDOUT) is a subroutine commonly used in various processes that require transmission of command data. In the present embodiment, when it is necessary to transmit an effect command, after acquiring the command data, the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) in FIG. 9 is called and executed by the CALLV instruction. This simplifies the command transmission control process when transmitting the effect control command at various timings, and can reduce the control load.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, it uses the effect means to cause the power-on standby effect to appear. For example, an effect image such as “Please Wait” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  Next, the first power supply abnormality check processing of FIG. 8 is executed (step S066, SPa22), and the “power-on signal and the supply communication confirmation signal (hereinafter abbreviated as“ power-on signal ”)” from the supply control board 29 are received. It waits for the transmission (steps S067 to S069, SPa23 to SPa26). The power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the ON / OFF information of the power-on signal is obtained from an input port 1 (P_INPT1) described later. The CPU 201 waits without ending the initial setting process until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. If the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the CPU 201 proceeds to steps S066 to S069. The game operation is not started only by repeating the processing. If the power-on signal is turned on (step S069: ON), the process exits the initialization process, returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and executes the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013. I do.

  If the flow of the above-mentioned steps S066 to S069 is described in detail according to the source code (SYSTEM_50 shown in FIG. 26A), the following processing contents are obtained.

  In SYSTEM_50 in FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first calls and executes the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK: FIG. 8) of the subroutine by the CALLV instruction, and checks whether the power supply abnormality signal is ON (SPa22). .

  Next, 8-bit data (input information) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is read into the A register (SPa23), and the read data is transferred (COPY) to the W register (SPa24). These SPa23 to SPa24 correspond to the “input port 1 data acquisition processing” of the processing of step S067, and the information of the input port 1 acquired in this processing (the input port 1 (P_INPT1) set in the W register). The input information) is also used in “branch determination information acquisition processing (step S013)” shown in FIG. 6A described later.

  Bits 0 to 7 (b0 to b7) of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) indicate the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) as shown in FIG. The first bit (b1) indicates the ON / OFF state of the replenishment signal, the second bit (b2) indicates the ON / OFF state of the ball count error signal, the third bit (b3) indicates the disconnection detection signal 1, Four bits (b4) are the ON / OFF signal of the disconnection detection signal 2, and the fifth bit (b5) is the ON / OFF state of the door open signal (door open sensor 61) (open / close of the door (for example, front frame 2)). State), the sixth bit (b6) indicates the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), and the seventh bit (b7) indicates the ON / OFF state of the power-on signal.

  The "RAM clear signal" is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM, and is usually an ON / OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation) of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by a hall clerk. Has a value corresponding to. The "setting key switch signal" is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed, and is usually set to ON / OFF of the setting key switch 94 operated by the hall clerk. It has a value corresponding to the OFF state (ON operation / OFF operation). For this reason, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting key switch signal is delayed, the hall clerk releases the hand from the switch, thereby overlooking the ON operation. In the present embodiment, such a situation is avoided. For this reason, these signals are promptly acquired when the power is restored. The “disconnection detection signal” is an error signal generated when a wiring (harness) connecting the substrates or the substrate and various sensors is disconnected or short-circuited. For example, if the wiring between the main control unit 20 (main board) and the payout control board 29 is broken, or if the wiring between the main control unit 20 and the upper starting port sensor 34a is broken, transmission or reception of a signal becomes impossible. Therefore, the disconnection detection signal is also promptly acquired. Each bit value is "1" when indicating the ON state, and is "0" when indicating the OFF state.

  After completing SPa23 to SPa24, the value of the seventh bit (b7) of the A register, that is, ON / OFF data of the power-on signal of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is set in the carry flag CF (SPa25), If the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF # 1), that is, if the power-on signal is not ON (b7 # 1), the process jumps to the top address of SYSTEM_50, that is, the first power supply abnormality check processing of step S066. Returning to (_VDDCHK), the processing of steps S066 to S069 is repeatedly executed until the carry flag CF becomes 1 (CF = 1), that is, the power-on signal becomes ON (b7 = 1) (SPa26). Then, when the power-on signal is turned on, the process exits this initialization process and returns to the main control side main process of FIG. 6A, and then executes the branch determination information acquisition process of step S013.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, when the above-described initialization processing (step S011) is completed, the branch determination information acquisition processing of FIG. 6A is executed (step S013). In this branch determination information acquisition process, the value of the W register, that is, the 8 bits of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the W register in the input port 1 data acquisition process (step S067) during the initialization process of FIG. The logical product (AND) of the data and the mask data "01100001B" is obtained, and the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal, the 5th bit corresponding to the door open signal, and the 6th bit corresponding to the RAM clear signal are obtained. The bit is masked (SPb1). As a result, the ON / OFF state (signal state (input state)) of the current setting key switch signal, door open signal, and RAM clear signal is acquired in the W register. For example, if the bit pattern of the W register after masking is “01100001B (bits 0, 5, and 6 are ON)”, the setting key switch signal, the door open signal, and the RAM clear signal are each in the ON state. If "00000001B (0th bit is ON)", it indicates that the door open signal and the RAM clear signal are in the OFF state, and only the setting key switch signal is in the ON state.

  In the present embodiment, a combination of ON / OFF states of three signals of a setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94), a door opening signal (door opening sensor 61), and a RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), that is, Depending on the value of the W register (combination of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit) obtained by the mask processing in step S013 (SPb1), the processing content (processing route) to be executed is different. Has become.

(About the processing contents of the migration destination by the conditional branch: FIG. 25)
In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, referring to FIG. 25, the processing is executed according to the value of the W register (combination of the values of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit). An outline of the processing route will be described. In FIG. 25, the processing is executed according to the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch signal, the door opening signal, and the RAM clear signal (the combination of the 0th bit, the 5th bit, and the 6th bit value of the W register). A processing route (migration destination processing route) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 25, there are a total of eight types of ON / OFF states indicating the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door opening signal, and the RAM clear signal. That is, according to the value of the W register obtained in the branch determination information acquisition process (step S013), the process branches (transfers) to one of the following processing routes (a) to (d). ing. In the following, for convenience of description, the combination of the values of the (0th bit, 5th bit, and 6th bit) of the W register is referred to as “W (x, y, z)” (where “x, y, z”). Is described as 0 or 1).

<(A) Setting change processing route (setting change mode)>
If the input states of the three signals of the setting key switch signal, the door opening signal, and the RAM clear signal are all ON (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)), the CPU 201 Determines that the setting change mode shift condition has been satisfied, and shifts the processing state to the “setting change processing route (steps S021 to S024, S030 to S032)”. This setting change processing route is a processing route in which a “setting change management process (step S023)” for controlling to a setting changeable state and an “in-region RAM clearing process (step S031)” for clearing a predetermined area of the RAM are executed. For example, the process is shifted when a person related to the hall performs a “setting change operation”. Although the details will be described later, when the process is shifted to the setting change processing route, in the work area (storage area) of the RAM 203, at least the storage area (measurement information storage area) related to the display control of the performance indicator 99 (outside the area) All areas of the RAM within the area except the RAM) are cleared (reset).

  In the present embodiment, when the processing is not shifted to the setting change processing route, any one of the following “RAM clear processing route”, “setting confirmation processing route”, and “backup restoration processing route” is performed according to the value of the W register. Moved to root.

<(B) RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)>
When at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door opening signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the ON state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 1), W ( 0, 1, 1) or W (0, 0, 1)), the CPU 201 determines that the RAM clear mode transition condition is satisfied, and sets the processing state to “RAM clear processing route (steps S029 to S032)”. Move to This RAM clearing process route is a process route in which the in-area RAM clearing process (step S031) is executed without executing the setting change management process (step S023) described later. The process is shifted to the case where a specific area of the RAM is cleared by the “RAM clear operation” without performing the “setting change operation”. Although described in detail later, the “specific area” is a storage area of the storage area of the RAM 203 excluding at least the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM area. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, the range of the RAM clear is more limited than when the setting change processing route is executed.

<(C) Setting check processing route (setting check mode)>
When the setting key switch signal and the door opening signal are ON and the RAM clear signal is OFF (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 0)), the CPU 201 checks the setting. Assuming that the mode transition condition has been satisfied, the processing state is shifted to the “setting confirmation processing route (steps S027 to S028)”. This setting confirmation processing route controls the current setting value to a setting confirmation state in which the current setting value can be confirmed without executing the setting change management processing (step S023) and the in-area RAM clearing processing (step S031). (Step S027) 'and a' backup restoration process (Step S028) 'for restoring the backup data are executed. Migrated when confirming.

<(D) Backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode)>
If at least one of the setting key switch signal and the door opening signal is in the OFF state and the RAM clear signal is in the OFF state (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 0, 0), W (0 , 1, 0) or W (0, 0, 0)), the CPU 201 determines that the backup recovery mode transition condition is satisfied, and shifts the processing state to the “backup recovery processing route (step S028)”. . This backup restoration processing route performs the backup restoration processing (step S028) without executing any of the setting change management processing (step S023), the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), and the setting confirmation processing (step S027). Is executed, for example, when the power supply is returned to the hall related person without performing any of the setting change operation, the RAM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation.

<(F) Power supply re-waiting process route (RAM error mode)>
As described above, if the process is not shifted to the “setting change process route” of (a), the “RAM clear process route”, “setting confirmation process route”, and “backup return process route” of (b) to (d) are performed. The process is shifted to any one of the processing routes. In the present embodiment, prior to these processes, the “RAM error determination process (RAM error determination process) is performed to determine whether an abnormality (RAM error) has occurred in the contents of the RAM 203. Steps S015 to S016) "are executed. In this RAM error determination processing, when it is determined that a RAM error has occurred, it is determined that the RAM error mode (power supply restart wait processing mode) transition condition has been satisfied, and the processing state is “power supply restart wait processing route”. (Steps S017 to S020) ”. When the processing is shifted to the power re-waiting processing route, for example, the progress of the game processing is forcibly stopped as a predetermined error processing.

  As described above, the power supply re-waiting process route is a process route that is shifted when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM. However, when the process is shifted to the setting change process route, the RAM error determination process is performed. The process is not executed, and therefore, the process is not shifted to the power re-waiting process route. Although the details will be described later, when the processing shifts to the setting change processing route, the setting change management processing (step S023) and the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described below are executed, so that the entire area of the in-area RAM (step S031) is executed. A work area related to a normal game including a set value storage area) is substantially initialized (cleared). That is, in the case of shifting to the “setting change processing route”, even if the data in the RAM is damaged, the damaged data will be initialized. Therefore, when the setting is changed, no RAM error occurs thereafter, and it is not necessary to execute the RAM error determination process to check whether the contents of the RAM are abnormal or not. . For this reason, when shifting to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing is not executed, and the contents of the RAM are not checked unnecessarily, thereby reducing the control burden.

  On the other hand, one of a “RAM clear processing route” for clearing a specific area of the in-area RAM, a “setting confirmation processing route” in which the RAM clear processing itself is not executed, and a “backup restoration processing route” in which the same processing is not executed In this case, even if the data in the RAM is damaged, the damaged data may remain without being cleared. As a result, problems may occur such that the program processing runs away or the normal operation cannot be restored from the backup data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the processing is shifted to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, the contents of the RAM are checked in advance before execution of the processing, and if an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM, Then, assuming that a RAM error has occurred, the processing state is shifted to the “power supply re-waiting processing route”. As a result, even when the processing route is shifted to a processing route other than the setting change processing route, it is possible to prevent a problem due to data corruption or the like. If a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not cleared unless the power is turned on again and the RAM is cleared by the setting change processing route (see FIGS. 6A and 8 described later).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 6A, after executing the branch determination information acquisition processing (step S013), it is determined whether or not to shift the processing state to a “setting change processing route (setting change processing mode)” (setting change). Branch determination processing: Step S014).

  In the setting change branch determination processing, the value of the W register of the first operand is compared with the 8-bit data “01100001B” specified by the second operand by the CP instruction to calculate the difference between them (SPb2). The process branches depending on whether or not the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, whether or not the setting key switch signal, the RAM clear signal, and the door opening signal are all ON (SPb3). When the result of the operation by SPb2 is zero, the bit pattern of the W register is the same value as '01100001B', that is, W (1,. 1, 1) (W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)). On the other hand, if the comparison result by SPb2 is not zero, other combinations are used. (W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1,1,1)).

  Specifically, when the comparison result by SPb2 is zero, that is, “W (x, y, z) = W (1, 1, 1)”, the zero flag ZF is set to 1, and the comparison result is not zero. That is, when “W (x, y, z) ≠ W (1, 1, 1)”, 0 is set to the zero flag ZF. When the zero flag ZF is 1 (ZF = 1), that is, when W (1, 1, 1) is set by the JR instruction of SPb3 (“JR NZ, SYSTEM_300”), the setting change mode transition condition Is established, the processing state is shifted to the setting change processing route (subsequent program 'SPc1' is executed), and if the zero flag ZF is not 1 (ZF = 0), that is, if it is not W (1,1,1) Assuming that the setting change mode transition condition has not been satisfied, the processing state is shifted to the RAM error determination processing (determination processing in step S015) described below (jump to SYSTEM_300). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the processing shifts to the setting change processing route, the RAM error determination processing (steps S015 and S016) is not executed.

  Note that SPb3 employs an 8-bit relative jump "JR instruction" instead of a 16-bit absolute jump "JP instruction" as a jump instruction. In the JP instruction, the jump destination address is specified by an absolute address (16 bits (2 bytes)), whereas in the JR instruction, the jump destination address is specified by a relative address (8 bits (1 byte)). The JR instruction has the advantage that the program capacity can be reduced by one byte. However, in the JR instruction, the specifiable range of the jump destination is in the range of -128 to +127 bytes from the location of the program counter (PC register). Therefore, the range is also limited by the absolute jump JP instruction. In the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of reducing the program capacity, all the jump instructions used in the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B use the JR instruction, and a scheme is used to make the most of the small memory capacity. .

(A. Setting change processing route (setting change mode): S014 → S021-S024 → S030-S032)
With reference to FIGS. 6A to 6B, FIG. 10, and FIGS. 26A to 26B, processing contents of the setting change processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the setting change processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a numeral in the column of “when setting is changed”. In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the processing of steps S021 to S024 and steps S030 to S032 of the setting change processing route will be mainly described.

  When the process shifts to the setting change processing route, first, the command data during setting change (BA5AH) is obtained (step S021, SPc1), and the obtained command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) ( Step S022, SPc2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change command, the effect control unit 24 executes “setting change effect” to notify that the setting value is being changed using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in blue, the speaker 46 outputs a warning sound of “Setting is being changed ♪”, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image of “Setting is being changed”. Note that the effect control unit 24 terminates the effect of the setting change being executed in response to reception of a setting completion command (BA09H) described later.

  Next, a setting change management process (M_SETTI) is executed (step S023). Here, the setting change management processing (M_SETTEI) of the subroutine is called and executed (SPc3).

(10. Setting change management processing: FIG. 10)
The setting change management process (M_SETTEI) in step S023 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart illustrating details of the setting change management process.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first clears a backup flag BF described later (step S901).

  Next, an input data creation process is executed (step S902). In this input data creation processing, input information such as the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting key switch 96 is obtained. For example, the input management processing of the main control timer interruption processing (S083 in FIG. 16). To be executed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc (set value data) stored in the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the in-area RAM is an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H) (step S903). In this embodiment, when the setting change processing route is executed, the power supply re-waiting processing route (steps S017 to S020: RAM error processing) is not executed. Therefore, the setting value Nc is checked before the setting change operation, and if an abnormality occurs, the setting value storage area is cleared (step S904). Hereinafter, the processing contents of steps S903 to S904 will be described in detail.

  If the game operation is normal, any one of the set value data (set value Nc) of '00H to 05H (normal value)' corresponding to the settings 1 to 6 should be stored in the set value storage area. It is. However, the set value data may be damaged due to some trouble, and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 may be set. Therefore, when the set value Nc is not in the range of 00H to 05H, it can be determined that some trouble has occurred in the set value Nc.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the set value Nc is in the range of 00H to 05H in the process of step S903. Specifically, after the set value Nc is obtained in the C register, the value of the C register (set value Nc) is compared with 06H by a CP instruction to determine the difference between them, and the comparison result (subtraction result) is obtained. If “set value Nc <06H (the subtraction result is negative)” (step S903: YES), it is determined that the set value Nc is within the normal range, and the process jumps to step S905, which will be described later. ≧ 06H (the subtraction result is not negative) ”(step S903: NO), the setting value Nc is regarded as an abnormal value, and the initial value 00H (setting 1) is set in the setting value storage area (setting). Value Nc ← 00H). The initial value of the setting value is not limited to setting 1 (00H), and may be any value of setting 2 to setting 6 (01H to 05H).

  In the processing of step S905, the first power supply abnormality check processing (_VDDCHK) shown in FIG. 8 is executed (step S905).

  Next, a security signal (setting change signal and / or door open state signal) indicating that the setting is being changed (during the setting change operation) is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906). The chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S908, step S909: NO). In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at a high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (YES in step S916 described below). It is determined whether or not the change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON. By providing a chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented.

  If the chattering prevention waiting time has become 0 (step S909: YES), the input data creation processing is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is ON, that is, the setting change operation is performed. The presence or absence is determined (step S911). In the present embodiment, when an ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, the input data creation processing for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S902 at the start of the setting change management processing. . This means that if the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is kept depressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly rises, it is detected as empty in step S910. This does not affect the determination process in step S911.

  If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S911: NO), it is determined that there is no setting change operation, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, if the setting change switch 95 is ON (step S911: YES), it is determined that a setting change operation has been performed, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) (step S912). As described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting value during the setting change (during the setting change operation) is switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6.

  When the process of step S912 is completed, it is determined again whether the current set value Nc is a normal value (step S913). If the current set value Nc is not a normal value (step S913: NO), 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set (setting value Nc ← 00H) (step S914).

  Next, based on the current setting value Nc, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change. However, the set value displayed here is a “temporary set value” before the set value is determined.

  When the processing of step S915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting change completion switch 96 is ON, that is, whether or not the setting change operation (setting change period) has been completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), it is determined that the setting change operation has not been completed (setting change operation end condition is not satisfied), and the process proceeds to step S905. Until is turned on (until the setting change operation end condition is satisfied), the processing of steps S905 to S916 is repeatedly executed.

  If the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (step S916: YES), it is determined that the setting value has been determined, and the current setting value Nc (setting work value of the C register) is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 203. (Step S917).

  Next, a set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In the set value confirmation display processing, the current setting display data is cleared, and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. In the setting confirmation LED of this embodiment, the DP unit (decimal point) of the setting display 97, which is a 7-segment LED, has its function, and when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the setting value being displayed disappears. , Only the DP section is turned on to notify that the set value has been confirmed (setting confirmation display). In the present embodiment, the display mode in which only the DP unit is turned on when the setting is determined has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there is no particular limitation as long as the display mode can identify that the setting value has been determined.

  Next, while the output of the security signal (setting change signal) is stopped (step S920), the setting completion command data (BA09H) is obtained (step S921), and the obtained command data is transmitted by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT). The result is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S922). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting completion command, the “setting change completion effect” for terminating the in-progress setting change effect and notifying that the setting change has been completed (setting value determined) is determined. It is executed for a period (predetermined time: for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated in red, and a sound (setting change completion sound) such as “Setting changed ♪” is output from the speaker 46, and a message “Setting changed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Display the effect image (setting change completion screen).

  In the present embodiment, after the setting change management processing (step S023) is completed, a predetermined area of the RAM is cleared by an in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) described below, and therefore, a RAM clear command (BA02H) is transmitted. Then, it is preferable to execute the RAM clear notification effect (see the broken line frame in the setting change column in FIG. 29). The RAM clear notification effect may be configured to be able to be notified as a part of the setting change completion effect, in a form accompanying the setting change completion effect, or after the setting change completion effect ends. Note that the RAM clear notification effect may be executed without executing the setting change completion effect. As the RAM clear notification effect, for example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated in red for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), and an alarm sound from the speaker 16 when the RAM is cleared is output. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays a background screen in the normal state (a background image corresponding to the normal effect mode (normal state)) (low-precision screen display), and the decoration pattern includes decorations for clearing the RAM. A combination of symbols (for example, “731”: decorative symbol when RAM is cleared) can be displayed (first power-on display mode). In this case, the display state of the liquid crystal display device 36 is maintained even after the RAM clear notification by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 16 is completed (the first power-on display mode (the effect of waiting for the demonstration start when the RAM is cleared)). Is maintained (during the start of the demonstration), and if a predetermined standby time (for example, 180 seconds) has elapsed without the game being started, the mode is shifted to the demo mode (“customer waiting effect (demo screen)” described later). be able to.

  Then, it waits until the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S923: NO), and if the OFF state of the setting key switch 94 is confirmed (step S923: YES), the display of the setting display 97 (here, The setting confirmation LED (DP unit) is turned off, and the process exits the setting change management process. Thus, a series of setting change operations has been completed. In this embodiment, the setting change completion effect appears for a predetermined time regardless of whether the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control-side main process of FIG. 6A, and proceeds to the process of step S024 described below.

  In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, at least until the game startable state is completed (until the CTC setting process of step S036 described later is executed (the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. 16 starts). Is performed) or at least until the loop processing of steps S040 to S045 is performed), even if the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state (the front frame 2 is in the open state), the door open error notification is not performed. It has become. However, from the viewpoint of security, when the door open sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door is open is transmitted to the hall computer HC using a security signal.

(Ψ: When notifying a door open error)
Of course, the "door open error notification" may be configured to be executable even before the game start enabling state is completed. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is turned on and off in red and the speaker 46 outputs a door opening alarm sound of "The door is open ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays an effect image of "The door is open". By the way, when performing a setting change, normally, the front frame 2 is opened, and then the setting change operation is performed. From the start to the end, a door opening error has occurred. Therefore, there is a problem of giving priority to the notification of the door opening error and the effect during the setting change or the effect of the completion of the setting change. The notification priority of the middle production and the setting change completion production is set high, or the door opening error is reported by using one production means (for example, the sound production and the light production by the decorative lamp 45 and the speaker 46 are used to make the notification. Yes), the effect during the setting change or the effect of the completion of the setting change is notified by using another effect means (for example, notified by the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36).

(Modification 1-1)
In the present embodiment, an example is described in which a dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided as a setting change switch, but the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM clear switch 98 may be made to function as a setting change switch without providing the setting change switch 95, that is, the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to be able to double as a setting change switch. In this case, a setting change operation can be performed by pressing the RAM clear switch 98.

(Modification 1-2)
In the present embodiment, a dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided as a setting change completion switch, but the present invention is not limited to this. The configuration key switch 94 may be made to function as a configuration change completion switch without providing the configuration change completion switch 96, that is, the configuration key switch 94 may be configured to double as the configuration change switch. In this case, the setting change end operation can be performed by turning on / off the setting key switch 94. In the case of this modification, the ON / OFF determination processing of the setting change completion switch 96 in step S916 is the ON / OFF determination processing of the setting key switch 94. Further, the determination processing in step S923 becomes unnecessary (the processing in the broken line portion in the drawing may be deleted), which leads to a reduction in control load.

(Modification 1-3)
Further, other sensors and switches, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball (for example, the sensor 34a, 35a, 52a, 43a, or 49a) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, in the determination processing of step S916, it is sufficient to determine that the set value has been determined based on the fact that the sensor has detected the game ball (ON state), for example, by taking care of the game ball in the winning opening. It should be noted that one of the above-described “Modifications 1-1” to “Modifications 1-3” may be a single modification or a combination of a plurality of modifications.

  As described above, when the setting change management processing is completed, the process proceeds to step S024 in FIG. 6A, the address of the setting change command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) is obtained (step S024), and the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) is performed. Execute (Step S030). Through the processing of steps S024 and S030, the effect control command (see the column of “setting change” in FIG. 29) relating to the end of setting change is transmitted.

  The details of the processing of the above-mentioned “steps S024 and S030” will be described below in detail according to the source code of FIG. 26A.

  After setting the head address of the setting change command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A) in the HL register pair (SPd1), jump to SYSTEM_250 (SPd2), and call and execute the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) by the CALLV instruction ( SPf2). Hereinafter, the setting change command transmission address table and the transmission command table selection processing will be described in detail.

(28A. Setting change command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2A): FIG. 28A (A))
The setting change command transmission address table will be described with reference to FIG. 28A. FIG. 28A shows a setting change command transmission address table.

  The setting change command transmission address table according to the present embodiment includes loop number (number of tables to be designated) data and head of the command creation table as data for creating the effect control command data transmitted at the time of setting change. The address is determined. In the case of the present embodiment, the tables to be designated are a “spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)” shown in FIG. 9B and a “customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)” shown in FIG. Therefore, the number of loops is two.

(Command creation table: FIG. 28A (B) (C))
Next, the specification specification command specification command creation table (D_SPEC) and the “customer waiting command generation table (D_BA04)” will be described.

  As shown in the figure, the “spec specification command creation table (D_SPEC)” and the “customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)” include the additional value data (here, 00H) and the command data to be transmitted. It is stipulated.

  The “addition value data” is offset data used when a change is made to the reference command data (reference command data). Therefore, when the added value data is 00H, the reference command data is acquired as the command data to be actually transmitted. When the added value is not 00H (for example, 01H), the added value is added to the reference command data. (In this example, the reference command data + 01H) is obtained as the command data to be actually transmitted.

(11. Transmission command table selection process: FIG. 11)
Next, the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) in step S030 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the transmission command table selection processing.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first sets the number of loops with reference to the “setting change command transmission address table” of FIG. 28A (A) acquired in step S024 (SPd1) (step S071).

  Next, the command creation table is selected with reference to the setting change command transmission address table (step S072). Here, the specification specification command creation table of FIG. 28A (B) and the customer waiting command creation table of FIG. 28A (C) are sequentially selected in two loops. Then, a first command data creation process shown in FIG. 12 is executed.

(12. First Command Data Creation Processing: FIG. 12)
FIG. 12 shows a flowchart of the first command data creation process in step S073. In the first command data creation process, as shown in FIG. 12, first, command data to be transmitted is acquired by referring to the command creation table selected in step S072 (step S076), and then, the command transmission of the subroutine is performed. The process (_CMDOUT) is called and executed, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S077). Here, in two loops, “F611H (specification command data)” based on the specification specification command creation table and “BA04H (customer waiting command data)” based on the customer waiting command creation table are acquired. , These command data are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24. That is, before the setting change operation is completed, the setting change command (BA5AH) is issued. After the setting change operation is completed, the setting completion command (BA09H), the specification designation command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are issued. ) Are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order (see the description of “setting change” in FIG. 29). When the RAM clear notification effect is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a RAM clear command (BA02H) is additionally transmitted.

  After executing the first command data creation process (step S073) in FIG. 12, the number of loops is decremented (step S074), and the processes of steps S072 to S075 are repeated until the number of loops becomes zero. Then, when the number of loops becomes zero (step S075: = 0), the process exits the transmission command table selection process.

  Note that the transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) of FIG. 11 is commonly used when a RAM clear process route (steps S029 to S032) described later is executed. When the RAM clear processing route is executed, the “RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2)” described later is used instead of the “setting change command transmission address table” shown in FIG. 28A selected by the setting change processing route. Is selected (see step S029 in FIG. 6B and FIG. 28B). Then, a transmission command table selection process (_MKCADR) is executed (step S030), and a target effect control command is transmitted.

(Regarding customer waiting effects and menu screens: Figs. 43 and 37)
When the effect control unit 24 receives the waiting-for-customer command, a demonstration movie for explanation of the game related to the gaming machine 1 and its introduction (demonstration) is played based on predetermined execution conditions. )]. Specifically, after receiving the waiting-for-customer command, the game is not started, that is, the operation-holding ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. When the time has passed, a customer waiting effect is displayed. During the normal game, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of the current symbol variation display game is continuously displayed until the above-described 180-second standby time elapses, and the decoration lamp 45 emits a predetermined light. The pattern 43 emits light, and the speaker 43 produces a “demonstration waiting effect” in which the sound is muted (a predetermined sound effect may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect starts.

  On the other hand, in the processing stage at the time of turning on the power, for example, after the setting change operation is completed, the main control unit 20 instructs the effect control unit 24 following the setting completion command (step S921), and waits for the customer. Although the command is transmitted, the production control unit 24 does not execute the customer waiting production at least until the setting change completion production ends. In the case of this embodiment, since the standby time of 180 seconds is provided, the setting change completion effect ends within this standby time, so that no particular problem occurs. In the case where the above-described RAM clear notification effect is executed when the setting is changed, it is preferable to execute a customer waiting effect after the end of the RAM clear notification effect. In addition, when a waiting command for a customer is received after the completion of the setting change operation, the customer waiting effect may be executed after the elapse of the waiting time of 180 seconds, but this stage is mainly performed before the pachinko hall store is opened. When the setting change completion effect appears without waiting for the elapse of the waiting time of 180 seconds, the RAM clear notification effect is executed following the setting change completion effect after the end of the effect. In this case, the customer waiting effect may be executed immediately after the end of the RAM clear notification effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during a demonstration start waiting effect or a customer waiting effect, a `` menu screen '' capable of displaying a game history and setting related to the game such as volume adjustment and light amount adjustment can be displayed and controlled. (Game setting mode control means: see FIGS. 37 to 40 and FIG. 43). Specifically, when a demonstration start waiting effect or a customer waiting effect is being performed, the presence or absence of a “menu display request operation (pressing the effect button 13)” from the player is monitored, and the menu display request operation is performed. In this case, the display is switched from the current display screen to the “menu screen 100” shown in FIG. The switchable timing to the menu screen, that is, the operation acceptance valid period of the effect button 13 is notified by the button LED 13b in a predetermined light emission mode.

  FIG. 43 shows a menu screen according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 43, on the menu screen 100, eight items “QR code (registered trademark) issuance 102a” to “menu screen end 102h” are displayed in a grid pattern as selection items (menu items) related to the game environment. On the lower side, along with character information (selection and determination) for explaining the operation method on the menu screen, a direction key image 104 imitating the direction key 75 and a button image imitating the effect button 13 106 are displayed side by side. Various menu items can be selected with the direction keys 75, and the selected menu items are highlighted. Thus, it is possible to easily identify which menu item is being selected. In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which “this sunrise ball ranking 102f” is being selected. If any of the menu items “QR code (registered trademark) issuance 102a” to “menu screen end 102h” is determined, an information screen corresponding to the menu item is displayed, and a predetermined game setting can be performed. I have. The effect control unit 24 has the function unit for the display control regarding these menu screens (game setting control means). Hereinafter, menu items closely related to the present invention will be described.

  When the “volume adjustment 102c” is determined, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the speaker 46 is displayed, and the player can adjust to a desired volume (adjustable in steps). It has become. When the “light amount adjustment 102g” is determined, a light amount adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the light amount (brightness) of the decorative lamp 45, the liquid crystal screen, or the like is displayed, and the player adjusts to a desired light amount. Is possible (adjustable step by step).

  When "Today's game history 102d" is determined, predetermined game information related to the gaming machine 1, for example, the number of jackpots, the number of revolutions until a jackpot is won, the jackpot type, the jackpot probability, and the like are displayed. The player can guess what setting value the setting value of the gaming machine 1 is based on the game information (for example, the jackpot probability) displayed by the “today's game history 102d”.

  When the “sunrise ball ranking 102f” is determined, a payout ranking display (FIG. 44) is displayed. When "menu screen end 102h" is determined, the menu screen 100 is ended and a demonstration start waiting effect is displayed.

  Here, the above-mentioned payout ranking display, which is closely related to the present invention, will be described. FIG. 44 shows an example of the payout ranking display.

(Ball ranking display: Fig. 44)
With reference to FIG. 44, the payout ranking display 771 according to the present embodiment includes, as its display contents or display items, the top three rankings of the total number of payouts at the time of the extended holiday from power-on to the present. This is displayed (high score image 771b is displayed). Here, in the present embodiment, the “total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive play” counts the big hit (initial hit) in the normal state as the first big hit and counts the total number of prize balls during the big hit game. Then, when the big hit (the second big hit) is won again in the latent state, the probable change state, or the time saving state, the number of prize balls during the big hit game is added. Thereafter, as long as the probable change state or the time saving state continues continuously, the number of prize balls in the jackpot won during that period is accumulated, and this is counted as the total number of balls to be played at the time of extended play. For example, if the first hit is a time-saving jackpot and the player loses the time-saving state without winning the jackpot during the subsequent time-saving state, only the "number of prize balls obtained during the first hit jackpot game" It is counted as the total number of balls played at the time. In addition, if the player wins the jackpot (second time) again during the latent state, the probability change state, or the time saving state after the first hit, “the total number of prize balls during the first hit jackpot game” + “the second time” The total number of prize balls during the jackpot game "is counted as the total number of balls played at the time of consecutive play. Thereafter, the probability change state or the time saving state continues, and if the jackpot is won (the Nth big hit) during the continuation period, the number of prize balls during the big hit game is accumulated. That is, “the total number of prize balls during the first big hit game” + “the total number of prize balls during the second big hit game” + ·· + “the total number of prize balls during the Nth big hit game” It is counted as the total number of balls played at the time.

  Regarding the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the main control unit 20 sends a special winning opening command when the player wins the special winning opening 50 or a general winning opening winning command transmitted when the general winning opening 43 is won. Commands (commands each including information on the number of award balls) can be grasped. In the present embodiment, the total winning number is counted as the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43 and the special winning opening 50. However, at least the number of prize balls in the special winning opening 50 may be targeted. Instead of the number of prize balls, the so-called “net increase” obtained by subtracting the number of out-balls from the number of prize balls may be counted.

  The effect control unit 24 compares the total number of balls at the time of the consecutive holidays with the history of the total number of balls, and updates the current ranking information if the current total number of balls is within the top three, This is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as a new payout ranking display. The update of the ranking information is executed when the big hit game ends. The effect control unit 24 outputs the information on the number of winning balls counted by the number-of-balls counting means based on a predetermined ranking condition to the number of winning balls in a predetermined game period, based on a predetermined ranking condition. Ranking display control means for performing display control during a display period (for example, during the display period of payout ranking display).

  In addition, the betting ranking display 771 shows, in addition to the total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive play, a player who has achieved a prize in the top three places, his own initials and favorite characters (hereinafter, “high score name”). ) Can be input up to three characters (see “AAA” in the figure). When the ranking information is updated, this input screen displays a blessing image such as “Congratulations on updating the high score! Then, a screen on which a high score name can be input is displayed. As the input means of the high score name, for example, a list screen of alphanumeric characters or the like is displayed, and an arbitrary character is selected and determined from the character group by using the operation means (the direction key 75 and the effect button 13). , A well-known input function may be employed. The input high score name is displayed as a name image 771a as shown in the figure (the figure shows a default “AAA”). Although the details will be described later, the payout ranking display 771 is also used when a setting change suggestion effect (end interval screen change: see FIGS. 52 and 53 described later) appears. Therefore, when a specific character is input as the high score name, the setting suggestion effect (end interval screen change) may be configured to appear. For example, when “FUJ” is input, an image display effect related to the current set value can be made to appear with a predetermined lottery probability (for example, using a lottery table in FIG. 52 described later). The payout ranking display may be that of today (the ranking display starts from zero after the power is turned on) or that the previous day's ranking display is taken over.

(About power saving mode)
After the start of the customer waiting effect (demo screen display), if a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied, the mode is switched to the “power saving mode”. This power saving mode is entered, for example, when a waiting time has elapsed after the start of the customer waiting effect, and when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed without generating an operation-holding ball and switching to a menu screen (game setting screen). Let it. When the condition for transition to the power saving mode is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 ends the demonstration mode (customer waiting effect), shifts to the power saving mode, and causes the effect only for the power saving mode (effect during the power saving mode) to appear. For example, a control screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display of "power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and a part or all of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs are controlled to be turned off. (Power saving control).

(In-area RAM clear processing: step S031)
Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the above-described transmission command table selection processing (step S030) is completed, next, the in-area RAM clear processing is executed (step S031, SPg1 to SPg3). In this in-area RAM clear processing, of the in-area RAM area for storing data used in the normal game processing (processing related to the symbol variation display game and the game), at least the entire area excluding the set value storage area (Normal data storage area) is initialized (cleared), and the operation state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. Therefore, even if the in-area RAM clear processing is executed, the out-of-area RAM (see FIG. 25) used for the processing relating to the base value (performance display) is not cleared. Note that the set value storage area (set value data) is not cleared even if the data is in the in-area RAM. The initialization and change of the setting value data are executed in the setting change management process (step S023 in FIG. 6A) described above and illustrated in FIG.

  The above-mentioned "normal data storage area" mainly includes various kinds of flags, operation timers, counters, and the like used in various random number update processing (step S041) to be described later and the main controller timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16). A storage area corresponding to each of the game progress data is defined. Typical data for game progress include the following data. Hereinafter, a part of the representative game progress data will be exemplified.

(A) Flags related to various functions for designating a game state (“Public electric part open extended state flag” that designates the operation state of the opening extension function, “Normal design time saving” that designates the operation state of the ordinary design time reduction function `` Status flag '', `` Normal symbol probable status change flag '' to specify the operation status of the normal symbol probable function, `` Special symbol time reduction status flag '' to specify the operation status of the special symbol time reduction function, `` Specify the operation status of the special symbol probable change function ''"Special symbol probable change state flag": Game state designation flag)
(B) "Special design time reduction counter" that counts the number of times the special symbol time reduction function is activated, "Special symbol probability variation counter" that counts the number of times the special symbol probability variation function is activated,
(C) "Various data related to the big hit lottery and the auxiliary hit lottery (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag, normal symbol hit determination flag, special symbol determination data (winning type data), normal symbol determination data, special stop symbol number ( Special stop symbol designation data), normal stop symbol number, various random numbers used for each lottery, etc.) "
(D) "Parameters related to the variable display operation state of special symbols and ordinary symbols (variable flag, special symbol operation status, ordinary symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "Current game state can be specified Game state data (game state number YJ) "," number of operation reserved balls (special figure 1 number of operation reserved balls, special figure 2 number of operation reserved balls, number of ordinary figure operation reserved balls) ",
(E) "Various data related to the execution of the hit game (current number of rounds (number of special motorized actor actuations), number of prescribed rounds, number of winning prize holes, condition device operation flag, small hitting flag, consecutive action of character objects) Device operation flag, special electric accessory operation status, round display LED number, etc.) "," Various data relating to execution of the open electric game (normal electric accessory operation status, ordinary electric accessory operation flag, etc.) "
(F) “Various operation timers for managing the progress of the game (excluding timers for displaying the base value)”, “winning counter for counting the number of winning balls”,
(G) “ON / OFF data related to switches and sensors (excluding ON / OFF data of sensors such as winning openings related to base value display)”,
(H) "various error flags", "backup flags BF", and the like.
In any case, when the in-area RAM clear processing (step S031) is executed, all data in the normal data storage area except the set value storage area and the out-of-area RAM is set to the initial state.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the address map of FIG. 24, 0 to 255 bytes in the RAM 203 are defined as the RAM within the area, and 256 to 511 bytes are defined as the RAM outside the area. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the start address (address 0000H) of the intra-area RAM is secured for one byte as a set value storage area. Further, a predetermined area of the intra-area RAM other than the set value storage area and the normal data storage area is used as a stack area for saving a return address when a subroutine is called. Specifically, 2 bytes are used as a stack area for saving (PUSH) a return address when calling "zero set processing (_ZEROSET2)" shown in SPg3 of FIG. 26A by a CALLV instruction. Note that the above-described zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) is processing for clearing data at a specified address to zero.

  Therefore, it is necessary to exclude the area to be cleared in the in-area RAM from the set value storage area and the above-mentioned area used as the return address stack area for a total of 3 bytes. Therefore, in the in-area RAM clear processing, first, the next address of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) is set in the HL register pair as the start address of the clear target area in the HL register pair (SPg1), and the data is cleared. 253 is set in the B register as the number of times the zero set process (_ZEROSET2) is performed (SPg2). Then, a zero set process (_ZEROSET2) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (SPg3). As a result, the area (for 253 bytes) excluding the set value storage area of the in-area RAM and the stack area for saving the return address is cleared to zero.

  Although details will be described later, the RAM outside the area, that is, the RAM area related to the performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, etc.) is not set as a clear target by the in-area RAM clear processing, and the main control is performed. In the performance display monitor process (step S102 in FIG. 16) during the side timer interrupt process, the contents of the RAM outside the area are checked, and if there is an abnormality in the contents, the RAM clear processing (RAM clear processing outside the area) is executed. (See step S102 in FIG. 16). As a result, for example, the business hours are ended during a hit game or a probable change state, and a RAM clear operation or a setting change operation is performed to set the game state to a normal state (initialization) or to change a set value. Even if it is performed, only the normal data storage area is cleared without clearing the data relating to the base value. Therefore, it is possible to take over the power interruption without being affected by the RAM clear operation or the setting change operation.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 6B, when the in-area RAM clearing process in step S031 is completed, an initial value at the time of RAM clear is set for specific data in the in-area RAM (normal data storage area) (power on) Time initial data setting processing: step S032, SPg4 to SPg6). In the power-on initial data setting process, the head address of an unillustrated “work area initial setting table (D_INSET)” is set in the HL register pair (SPg4), and the specified work area is specified by the CALLV instruction. 'Data set processing (_DTSET)' for setting specific data is called and executed (SPg5).

  In the "work area initialization table (D_INSET)", address data for specifying a specific address of the intra-area RAM and initial data for setting in a storage area specified by the address are defined. By executing the “data set processing (_DTSET)”, initial data is set in the specified RAM area.

  In the present embodiment, an error notification timer (W_SGTMER), a special figure 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO), and a special figure 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO) are specified as designated storage areas, and the error notification timer (W_SGTMER) is specified. Is set to 30,000 ms, and the same special stop symbol number 200 (specific loss symbol data: for example, loss A corresponding stop) is set in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number (W_T1STPNO) and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number (W_T2STPNO). (Symbol data) is set (in this embodiment, a plurality of types of loss A to C are provided as loss types). The error notification timer here is the output time of the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals) indicating that the RAM clear has been executed. The RAM clear signal is transmitted through the frame external terminal board 21 to the hole computer HC. Is output to In the present embodiment, the same special stop symbol number is set as the special symbol 1 stop symbol number and the special symbol 2 stop symbol number as the initial data, but different loss symbol data may be set. In addition, data other than the lost symbol data may be used. For example, data corresponding to a specific symbol (a symbol dedicated to clearing the RAM) that is not displayed during a game may be set. Further, non-lighting (light-out) data (light-out data) may be set. As for the data relating to the ordinary symbol (ordinary stop symbol number (W_FSTPNO)), the lost symbol data or the non-lighted data may be set as in the special symbol.

  When the data set process (_DTSET) of SPg5 is completed, the process jumps to step S033 (SYSTEM_850) described later (SPg6). As a result, after the setting change processing route is completed, the processing state shifts to the processing of step S033 of the merging point.

  Note that, in the setting change branch determination process (step S014), in order to determine that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, the front key 2 is opened, and then the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned off. It is necessary to turn on the power while both are turned on. This is because if the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after opening the front frame 2 and turning on the power switch (not shown) inside the gaming machine, the power supply is turned on until the power is turned on. Usually, it takes several seconds. However, before the ON operation, the process of step S067 in the initial setting process of FIG. 7 is executed and the input information of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is obtained. However, the OFF state is detected for the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear switch signal. That is, when the setting change branch determination processing is executed, a combination other than W (1, 1, 1) is acquired, and in the setting change branch determination processing, the setting change transition mode transition condition is not satisfied and the setting change branch determination processing is not performed. This is because the processing route is not executed. In this case, as shown in the figure, the process follows the processing route in which the processes in and after step S015 are executed, and thereafter, the setting change operation is controlled to be prohibited. In this case, after the power is once turned off, the power may be turned on again while the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned ON. If it is determined that the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied, then the setting change operation allowable state is maintained even if the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned off. However, in the case where the setting key switch 94 is used as the setting change completion switch in place of the setting change completion switch 96, as described above, the setting key switch 94 is turned off after the setting change transition mode transition condition is satisfied. Then, the setting change period (setting change operation) ends.

  Next, the processing routes of the RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode), the setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode), and the backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode) will be sequentially described. First, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the “RAM error determination processing (steps S015 to S016)” executed prior to these processing routes will be described in detail.

(RAM error determination processing: steps S015 to S016)
As described above, when the determination result in step S014 of FIG. 6A is a combination other than W (1,1,1), it is determined that the setting change mode transition condition is not satisfied, and the processing state is changed to steps S015 to S015. The process proceeds to “RAM error determination process” in step S016 (SPb3: jumps to SYSTEM_300 when zero flag ZF = 1).

  This RAM error determination process is a process of determining whether or not to shift the processing state to a “power supply re-waiting processing route (RAM error mode)” in steps S017 to S020. In the RAM error determination processing, first, it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal (step S015). Here, the data of the RAM area to be determined is the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI). As described above, the setting values are set in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6. If the setting values are normal, the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) corresponds to the setting values in six steps. One of the values from 00H to 05H must be stored. However, an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H may be stored due to some problem.

  Therefore, in this processing, the set value data of the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) is compared with 06H by the CP instruction to calculate the difference between them (SPh1). If the value Nc <06H ”), it is determined that the set value Nc is within the normal range, and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S016 (SPh2: if the carry flag CF = 1, the process of SPh3 is executed). If the comparison result is not negative (when the setting value Nc ≧ 06H), the setting value Nc is determined to be an abnormal value, and the processing shifts to the power supply re-waiting processing route of steps S017 to S020 related to the power re-powering waiting processing ( SPh2: If carry flag CF # 1, jump to SYSTEM_400). The details of the power supply re-waiting processing route will be described later.

  In the determination process of step S015, when it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO), subsequently, it is determined whether the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016, SPh3 to SPh4). ). This backup flag BF is set to “5AH (normal value)” when the backup processing is executed normally in the second power supply abnormality check processing (step S081 in FIG. 16) described later. It is set in the storage area (W_BACKFLG). Therefore, if normal, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, the backup flag BF may not be a normal value due to some trouble. Therefore, in the present process, the value of the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is compared with 5AH (normal value) by the CP instruction to calculate the difference between them (SPh3). If the comparison result is zero, (SPh3) (BF = 5AH), it is determined that the backup flag BF is a normal value, and the process proceeds to the determination processing of step S025 (SPh4: if the zero flag ZF = 1, jump to SYSTEM_600). If the comparison result is not zero (BF). (# 5AH), the backup flag BF is regarded as an abnormal value, and the processing shifts to a power supply re-waiting processing route described later (SPh4: when the zero flag ZF = 0, the SPi1 of the SYSTEM_400 at the next address is executed).

  If the RAM is not abnormal and the backup flag BF is also a normal value (5AH), the process proceeds to the RAM clear branch determination process shown in FIG. 6B (step S025, SYSTEM_600 in FIG. 26B). This RAM clear branch determination process is a process of determining whether to shift the processing state to a “RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode)”.

  Here, the RAM clear branch determination processing is performed when the value of the W register is a combination other than W (1, 1, 1), specifically, as shown in FIG. Bit), the door open signal (fifth bit), and the RAM clear signal (sixth bit) when at least one of them is OFF (when the determination result in step S014 is NO). Of these, in order for the RAM clear processing route transition condition to be satisfied, it is sufficient that at least the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, that is, the sixth bit is 1.

  Therefore, in the RAM clear branch determination process, it is determined whether or not the sixth bit of the W register is 1. First, the value of the sixth bit of the W register is set in the carry flag CF (SPj1). Next, if the carry flag CF is 1 (CF = 1) by the JR instruction of SPj2, the RAM clear processing route transition condition is Assuming that the process is established, the process jumps to the process of step S029, which is the first process of the RAM clear process route, that is, “SYSTEM — 200” shown in FIG. 26A. However, if the carry flag CF is not 1 (CF ≠ 1), it is determined that the RAM clear processing route transition condition is not satisfied, and the next step is the setting confirmation branch determination processing in step S026, that is, SYSTEM_600 shown in FIG. 26B. Of SPk1 is executed. The details of the setting confirmation branch determination process (step S026) will be described later.

(B. RAM clear processing route (RAM clear mode): S025 → S029-S032)
The processing contents of the RAM clear processing route will be described. In the source code shown in FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the execution order of the processing according to the RAM clear processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a numeral in the column of “when the RAM is cleared”. In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the processing of steps S029 to S032 in the RAM clear processing route will be mainly described.

  When the process proceeds to the RAM clear processing route, first, the address of the RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2) in FIG. 28B is obtained (step S029, SPe2), and then the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) in FIG. 11 is executed. (Step S030, SPf2 of SYSTEM_250). The address acquisition processing in step S029 and the address acquisition processing in step S024 described above are substantially the same, except for the address table to be acquired (see SPd1 and SPe2).

(28B. RAM clear command transmission address table (D_MKCADR2): FIG. 28B)
FIG. 28B shows the above-described RAM clear command transmission address table. The basic configuration of the RAM clear command transmission address table is the same as that of the setting change command transmission address table shown in FIG. 28A.

When the RAM clear command transmission address table is referred to, as shown in FIGS. 28B (B) to (D),
(B) “RAM clear command creation table (D_BA02)”,
(C) "Specification command creation table (D_SPEC)",
(D) “Customer waiting command creation table (D_BA04)”,
Are sequentially selected (the number of loops is three), and the command data defined in these command generation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops (FIG. 11). That is, in the RAM clear processing route, three types of commands, that is, the RAM clear command (BA02H), the specification specification command (F611H), and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in this order. (See the description column of “RAM clear” in FIG. 29).

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command (BA02H), the effect mode is set to the initial state “normal effect mode”, the effect state is returned to the initial state, and the RAM is cleared using the effect means. A notification effect (error notification corresponding to RAM clear) is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully lit in red, an alarm sound is output from the speaker 46 when the RAM is cleared, and an effect image such as “RAM is being cleared” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In step S029, the RAM clear command is transmitted and the customer waiting command is transmitted. However, at this timing, the customer waiting effect is not performed. Execute For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a demonstration start waiting effect (when waiting for a waiting time of 180 seconds until the start of a customer waiting effect (start of demonstration screen display)) or a demonstration screen (a waiting time of 180 seconds). (In the case where a customer waiting effect is started immediately without waiting). In any case, the RAM clear notification effect is executed with the highest priority.

  After the transmission command table selection processing (step S030) is completed, the RAM in the area is cleared (steps S031, SPg1 to SPg3) and the initial data setting processing at power-on (steps S032, SPg4), similarly to the setting change processing route already described. To SPg6). As a result, after completing the RAM clear processing route, the processing state shifts to the processing of step S033 (SYSTEM_850) of the merging point.

  In the intra-area RAM clearing process (step S031) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the intra-area RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when the RAM clear processing route is executed, only the other game data (data related to the normal data storage area) is cleared without changing the set value when the power is turned off. For example, although the set value remains the same value at the time of the previous power-off, the game is started in the initialized state (normal state and initial state without the held data) in the game state and the held data. Becomes Thus, for example, when it is desired to take over only the set values from the previous day's business, the clearing operation can be completed by a simple operation of turning on / off the RAM clear switch 98 without performing a setting change operation with many work steps. There is an advantage that.

  Returning to the description of the RAM clear branch determination process (step S025) in FIG. 6B. In the RAM clear branch determination process, when the RAM clear process route transition condition is not satisfied, that is, when the value of the sixth bit of the W register obtained in SPj1 of FIG. 26B is 0 (carry flag CF # 1 ), The setting confirmation branch determination process in step S026, that is, the process of SPk1 in FIG. 26B is executed.

  The setting confirmation branch determination processing is processing for determining whether to shift the processing state to the “setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode)” or the “backup restoration processing route (backup restoration mode)”. Specifically, the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0), that is, whether the setting key switch signal (0th bit) and the door opening signal (5th bit) are ON. Is determined (step S026). If the value of the W register is a combination of W (1, 1, 0) (step S026: YES), it is determined that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied, and the “setting confirmation processing” of step S027 is executed. If not (step S026: NO), it is determined that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied and the backup restoration mode transition condition is satisfied, and the “backup restoration process” of step S028 described later is executed.

  The above-described setting confirmation branch determination processing will be described with reference to the source code shown in FIG. 26B. Is calculated, and when the comparison result (subtraction result) is zero, that is, when W (1, 1, 0), the zero flag ZF is set to 1, and when it is not zero, that is, W If not (1, 1, 0), 0 is set to the zero flag ZF (SPk1). Then, if the zero flag ZF is set to 1 by the JR instruction of SPk2, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the setting check mode is satisfied, and the program of the next process, SYSTEM_650 (SPm1 to SPm20), that is, the setting check process of step S027 is executed. I do. However, if the zero flag ZF is not 1 (zero flag ZF = 0), the setting confirmation mode transition condition is not satisfied, in other words, the backup restoration mode transition condition is satisfied, and the processing state is changed to the backup restoration process (described later). The process proceeds to step S028) (jump to SYSTEM_800).

(C. Setting confirmation processing route (setting confirmation mode): S026 → S027)
The setting confirmation processing in step S027 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6B, 13, and 26A to 26B. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the setting confirmation process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the setting confirmation processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a numeral in the column of “when setting is confirmed”. In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the description will be focused on the setting confirmation processing in step S027 of the setting confirmation processing route.

  In FIG. 13, first, the CPU 201 sets the setting confirmation command data (E021H) in the DE register pair (step S930, SPm1), and transmits the obtained command data by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) to the effect control unit 24. (Step S931, SPm2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the command during setting confirmation, the effect during setting confirmation is executed using the effect means. For example, an effect image such as “Setting is being confirmed” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

(Ω: When notifying a door open error)
By the way, when the door opening error is configured to be notified, when confirming the set value, as in the case of the setting change described above, which of the door opening error notification and the effect during the setting check is given priority notification? However, in order to clearly notify the processing state, as in the same event as the setting change effect and the setting change completion effect described above, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is set higher than the door opening error notification. Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the notification of the door opening error is notified by using one effect means, and the effect of completion of the setting change is notified by using another effect means.

  Next, set value data is acquired from the set value storage area (W_SETTEI) in the C register (step S932, SPm3).

  Next, the first power supply abnormality check processing (_VDDCHK) of the subroutine is called and executed by the CALLV instruction (step S933, SPm4).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is ON (steps S934 to S936, SPm5 to SPm7). Specifically, the data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) is transferred to the A register (SPm5), and the logical product of the 8-bit data of the input port 1 (P_INPT1) transferred to the A register and the mask data “00000001B” ( AND) and mask the bits other than the 0th bit corresponding to the setting key switch signal (SPm6). As a result, the ON / OFF state of the current setting key switch signal is acquired in the A register.

  If the setting key switch signal is in the ON state, the value of the A register obtained in the above-described mask processing of SPm6 becomes “00000001B”, and the zero flag ZF is set to 0 (ZF = 0). In this case, the program shifts to SPm8 by the SPm7 JR instruction, and sets 8-bit data “00000010B” specified by the second operand in the A register (SPm8). Next, “00000010B” of the A register is output to the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) (SPm9). In the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2), for example, the 0th bit is a setting change signal and the first bit is an information terminal for outputting a security signal (for example, a setting confirmation signal). Therefore, the security signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC by SPm9 (see step S937).

  Next, during setting confirmation, data for setting display to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created (step S938), the data is output-controlled, and the current set value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97 (step S939). .

  The processing in steps S938 to S939 will be described along the source code with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A shows a source code (SPm3, SPm10 to SPm14) corresponding to the processing of steps S932, S938 to S939 picked up from the source code shown in FIG. 26B.

  Referring to FIG. 27A, first, CPU 201 sets the head address of the setting display data table (D_7SEGDATA) shown in FIG. 27B in the HL register pair (SPm10). In this setting display data table, as shown in FIG. 27B, display pattern data for 7 seg corresponding to settings 1 to 6 is defined.

  Next, the setting value data stored in the C register, that is, the setting value data acquired in SPm3 (see step S932) is transferred to the A register (SPm11). Next, the content of the address specified by the value (HL + A) obtained by adding the value of the HL register pair (the top address of the setting display data table) and the value of the A register (setting value data) is set in the W register. (SPm12). That is, the top address (1 LED display pattern) of the setting display data table is the reference address, and the setting value data (any value of 00H to 05H corresponding to the settings 1 to 6) of the A register is offset from the reference address. Acts as a value. For example, if the current setting value is 3, the A register (offset value) is 02H, so that the LED data “01001111B (′) specified by the address obtained by adding 02H to the top address of the setting display data table. 3 ′ LED display pattern) ”is set in the W register. Then, bit data "00010000B (b4-b7: dynamic lighting commons 0 to 3)" for setting the dynamic lighting common C3 for displaying the setting display 97 to the ON state is set in the A register (SPm13).

  Next, the LED display pattern data of the W register is output to the LED data port (P_LED) for dynamic lighting data, and the dynamic lighting common data of the A register is output to the LED common port (P_LEDCMN) (step S939, SPm14). The operation of the mnemonic “OUTW (p), WA” shown in SPm14 is “(p + 1, p) ← WA” (`p 'indicates an I / O port address).

  By the above SPm10 to SPm14, the current setting value Nc is displayed on the setting display 97. It is preferable that the setting confirmation LED (DP unit) is not lit or blinked in the setting display during setting confirmation. This is because the setting display during setting confirmation displays the set value that has already been determined. If the DP section is lit even during setting confirmation, the setting value is displayed when the setting value is confirmed by the setting change operation. This is because there is a risk that the display may be confusing during the setting confirmation.

  When SPm14 ends, the process jumps to SYSTEM_700 (SPm15), and thereafter SPm4 to SPm15 until the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is confirmed (until the determination in step S936 becomes NO). (Steps S933 to S939) are repeatedly executed. That is, the processing of steps S933 to S939 is repeatedly executed until the setting check (setting check period) ends, and the current setting value is continuously displayed on the setting display 97 (setting check display).

  Returning to the description of step S936, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S936: NO), the value of the A register obtained in the above-described mask processing of SPm6 becomes “00000000B”, and the zero flag ZF is set. 1 is set (ZF = 1). In this case, it is determined that the setting check has been completed, the process jumps to SYSTEM_750 (SPm7), and the setting check end processing in steps S940 to S943 is executed.

  Here, as the setting confirmation end processing, first, the value of the WA register pair is updated to 0000H by calculating the exclusive OR (XOR) between the WA register pairs, and the updated value is used to update the LED common port (P_LEDCMN). ) And the external terminal port 2 (P_GAIBU2) are cleared to zero (SPm16 to SPm18). Thus, the setting confirmation display on the setting display 97 is terminated (turned off), and the security signal is stopped (steps S940 and S941). In the present embodiment, the display of the set value is immediately terminated after the setting is confirmed (after the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) is confirmed). As described above, the setting value itself is not changed, and it is not necessary to notify the final setting value (determined setting value) as after the setting change. Therefore, when the setting confirmation is completed (after confirming the OFF state of the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94)), a process of displaying the set value for a predetermined time, such as after the setting change (step S918 in FIG. 10), is performed. The display of the set value is immediately terminated without performing the process (step S936: NO → S940). This can contribute to reducing the program capacity and the control load.

  Next, the E register is incremented (SPm19). When this SPm19 is executed, the value "21H" of the lower byte of the command data during setting confirmation (E021H) acquired in SPm1 (step S930) is set in the E register. As a result, the value of the E register is updated to “22H”. As a result, in the DE register pair, "E022H" in which the value of the D register is "E0H (see SPm1)" and the value of the E register is "22H", that is, the "setting confirmation end command" data is acquired ( Step S942, SPm1, SPm19). Then, the command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (step S943, SPm20), and thus a series of setting confirmation periods is completed. When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is ended. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods has ended. In addition, when the effect control unit 24 receives the confirmation end command, the effect during the setting confirmation that is being executed may be simply ended, but the “setting confirmation end effect” is performed for a predetermined period (a predetermined time) by using the effect means. (Time: for example, 5 seconds). For example, the decoration lamp 45 is turned on in all yellow, and a sound (setting confirmation completion sound) such as "Setting confirmation completed ♪" is output from the speaker 46, and the LCD 36 displays "Setting confirmation completed." Effect image (setting confirmation completion screen) can be displayed.

  When the above setting confirmation processing is completed, the processing state shifts to the “backup restoration processing” described below (step S028).

(D. Backup restoration process route (backup restoration mode): backup restoration process (step S028) execution route)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6B, 14, and 26A to 26B, processing contents of the backup restoration processing route will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the backup restoration process. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing by the backup restoration processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a numeral in the column of “at the time of backup restoration”. In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the backup restoration processing route of step S028 will be mainly described among the backup restoration processing routes.

  As described above, the processing route in which the backup restoration process in step S028 is executed includes (I) the route in which the backup restoration process is executed through the setting confirmation process in step S027, and (II) the setting change process. Without executing any of the setting change management process related to the route (Step S023), the in-area RAM clear process related to the RAM clear process route (Step S031), and the setting check process related to the setting check process route (Step S027). There is a processing route in which the backup restoration process is executed independently, and the backup restoration process route here refers to the latter processing route in which the backup restoration process is executed alone. Therefore, in the backup restoration processing route, as shown in FIG. ) Is executed in either case.

  In FIG. 26B, the CPU 201 first calls and executes “backup restoration command processing (M_MKINFO)” for transmitting an effect control command related to backup restoration (SPn1). The backup restoration command processing (M_MKINFO) includes SPn1 to SPn4, and the processing of steps S951 to S957 in FIG. 14 is realized by these programs.

  The “backup restoration command processing (M_MKINFO)” of SPn1 will be described with reference to FIG. The backup restoration command processing (M_MKINFO) is mainly configured by the processing of steps S951 to S956 shown in FIG.

  14, the CPU 201 first obtains the address of the backup restoration command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1) shown in FIG. 28C (step S951), and then executes the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR) of FIG. Execute (step S952). The processing of steps S951 to S952 and the processing contents of steps S029 to S030 of FIG. 6B described above are substantially the same except that the command transmission address table to be obtained is different.

(28C. Backup return command transmission address table (D_MKCADR1): FIG. 28C)
FIG. 28C shows the backup restoration command transmission address table described above. The basic configuration of the backup restoration command transmission address table is the same as the setting change command transmission address table of FIG. 28A and the RAM clear command transmission address table of FIG. 28B, which have already been described. I will explain it.

In the transmission command table selection processing (_MKCADR), when the backup restoration command transmission address table is referred to, as shown in FIG.
“Power failure recovery display command creation table (D_BA03)” in FIG. 28C (B),
FIG. 28C (C) “Special figure 1 reserved number designation command creation table (D_B0C0M)”,
FIG. 28C (D) “Special figure 2 reserved number designation command creation table (D_B1C0M)”,
Are selected in this order (the number of loops is three), and the command data defined in these command creation tables are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in three loops. (Refer to the transmission command table selection process in FIG. 11). That is, in the backup restoration processing route, first, three types of the power failure restoration display command (BA03H), the special figure 1 suspension number designation command (B0xxH), and the special figure 2 suspension number designation command (B1xxH) are given to the effect control unit 24. Will be transmitted in this order (see the description column of “backup restoration” in FIG. 29).

  Here, as for the power failure recovery display command, as shown in FIG. 28C (B), since the added value data is 0, BA03H of the reference command data is transmitted as the command data. However, as for the special figure 1 reservation number designation command and the special figure 2 reservation number designation command, as shown in FIGS. B001H and B101H of the reference command data change. This will be described in detail below.

  “W_T1GONUM” in the special figure 1 hold number designation command creation table of FIG. 28C (C) is a special figure 1 hold number data storage area in the RAM within the area, and is a special figure 2 hold number designation command creation area of FIG. 28C (D). 'W_T2GONUM' in the table is a special figure 2 operation pending ball count data storage area of the RAM in the area. Therefore, the values of 'W_T1GONUM' and 'W_T2GONUM' vary depending on the number of existing operation pending balls (0 to 4 (maximum pending storage number)).

  Therefore, when the special figure 1 operation pending ball designation command creation table is referred to, any one of 00H to 04H corresponding to 0 to 4 special figure 1 operation pending balls at the time of power interruption (at the time of backup). When the value is acquired as the added value data and the special figure 2 operation pending ball designation command creation table is referred to, similarly, any one of 00H to 04H corresponding to the special figure 2 operation pending ball number 0 to 4 The value is obtained as addition value data. Therefore, the special figure 1 hold number specification command is any of B001H to B005H, and the special figure 2 hold number specification command is any of B101H to B105H. Sent. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is correctly notified of the number of operation-holding spheres at the time of power interruption, and the effect control unit 24 performs the operation based on the special figure 1 operation-holding ball designation command and the special figure 2 operation-holding ball designation command. The hold icons corresponding to the number of active balls can be lit on the hold display sections a1 to d1 of the hold display area 76 and the hold display sections a2 to d2 of the hold display area 77 shown in FIG. .

  Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure recovery display command (BA03H), it makes use of the effect means to produce a “recovery completion effect” for notifying that the restoration has been completed. For example, an effect image such as “Recovered from a power outage and restart the game” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 for a predetermined time.

  Then, when the transmission command table selection processing in step S952 is completed, next, a second command data creation processing is executed (step S953).

(15. Second command data creation process: FIG. 15)
FIG. 15 shows a flowchart of the second command data creation processing. In the second command data creation processing, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the specification specification command data (F611H) is obtained (step S961), and the obtained command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission processing (_CMDOUT). (Step S962).

  Next, the return game state designation command data (FAxxH to FExxH) is acquired (step S963), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (step S964). The return-time game state designation command (FAxxH to FExxH) is, for example, a command for designating the game state number YJ at the time of backup. (FB01H) in the case of (high-probability, with electric support), "FC01H" in the time saving state (low-probability, with electric support), and "FD01H" in the latent state (high-probability, without electric support) Sent. The effect control unit 20 grasps the game state based on the return-time game state designation command data, causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a background image of the effect mode corresponding to the game state, and displays the decorative pattern. Displays a combination of decorative symbols at the time of backup restoration (for example, "315": decorative symbol for restoration) (second power-on display mode (RAM clear wait start effect)). After the backup is restored, the game operation is started normally, so that the effect control process corresponding to the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 is executed according to the processing state after the backup is restored. . The above-described second power-on display mode is the same as the first power-on display mode when the RAM is cleared. May be maintained. In this case, the presence or absence of the setting change can be concealed. Then, if 180 seconds have elapsed without starting the game, a customer waiting effect may be executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 14, when the second command data creation processing of step S953 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol (both of the special figures 1 and 2) is not fluctuating (step S954).

  The determination as to whether or not the status is not fluctuating is performed by acquiring the special symbol operation status in the special symbol operation status storage area (W_TJOBST) of the RAM in the area and specifying that the acquired status value is not fluctuating. It is determined whether it is a value. The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and the status value is changed according to the processing state (the processing state of the special symbol change display operation), and the special symbol operation status storage area (W_TJOBST). In the special symbol operation status, "standby (01H)", which specifies that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next variation, and that the behavior of the special symbol is varying (variable display) is specified. "Fluctuating (02H)", designates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (fixed) being displayed (during special symbol confirmation time), "Checking (03H)", and the special symbol is on standby And "waiting for customer (00H)" for designating that the state has not been held (see the special symbol management process in FIG. 16 described later). If the special symbol is not fluctuating, the special symbol operation status is 01H in the waiting state or 00H in the waiting state for the customer, but in this determination processing, it is “00H” which is designated as waiting for the customer. It is determined whether or not.

  Returning to the description of the determination processing in step S954, if the special symbol is not fluctuating, that is, if the special symbol operation status is “00H” that is designated as waiting for a customer (step S954: YES), the command data for waiting for a customer ( BA04H) is obtained (step S955), and the obtained command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) (step S956).

  As described above, at the time of backup restoration, first, BA03H (power failure restoration display command), B0xxH (first special reserved number designation command: 'xx = 01H to 05H'), B1xxH (second) by the processing of steps S951 to S953. Special reserved number specification command: 'xx = 01H to 05H'), F611H (spec command), FAxxH to FExxH (return game state specification command) are sequentially transmitted in this order, and if the special symbol is not changing, BA04H (Command waiting for a customer) is additionally transmitted (see the description column of “backup restoration” in FIG. 29).

  After the command transmission processing of step S956 is completed, subsequently, RAM clear processing at the time of backup restoration is executed (step S957, SYSTEM_800 (SPn2 to SPn4)). On the other hand, when the special symbol is not in the non-changing state, that is, when the special symbol operation status is not “00H” that is designated as waiting for a customer (step S954: NO), the special symbol is in the changing state or in the standby state waiting for the next change start. Assuming that there is, the backup waiting RAM clearing process is executed without transmitting the customer waiting command (step S957).

  In the backup clearing RAM clearing process, a specific area of the in-area RAM is cleared when the backup is recovered. In the present embodiment, although not shown, the start address (address 0000H) of the RAM in the area is the set value storage area (W_SETTEI), the address 0001H is the storage area (W_BACKFLG) for the backup flag BF, and the addresses 0002H to specific (For example, address 0021H) is an error-related specific data storage area to be cleared when the backup is restored. For example, addresses 0002H to 0021H are assigned W_PWRCNT (a power supply abnormality confirmation counter shown in FIG. 17 to be described later) to W_SWFTMR3 (winning port error detection timer 3). A storage area for a specific error, such as a detection timer for detecting an error or an error notification timer, is defined.

  In the RAM clearing process at the time of backup restoration, as shown in SPn2 to SPn4 of SYSTEM_800 in FIG. 26B, first, the address of W_BACKFLG (storage area of the backup flag BF) is set in the HL register pair (SPn2), and then described above. As the number of times of processing in “zero set processing (_ZEROSET2)”, the address of 'W_SWFTMR3 (winning-hole error detection timer 3) -address of W_BACKFLG + 1' is set in the B register (SPn3), and the zero set processing (_ZEROSET2) is called. Execute (SPn4). As a result, the storage area of the backup flag BF to the specific storage area related to the error (here, W_SWFTMR3) is cleared to zero.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the backup is restored, only the specific error-related work area is initialized, so that the specific error information (such as radio wave error information) before the power failure is not carried over. As a result, a specific error can be resolved by simply turning on the power again, that is, by executing the backup restoration process. However, if there is an abnormality in the set value data or the backup flag BF, the power-on wait processing (steps S017 to S020) described later is executed by the RAM error determination processing in steps S015 to S016, and the power is turned on again. Unless a setting change operation is performed, the error cannot be canceled.

  As described above, when the RAM restoration processing at the time of backup restoration is completed, the processing state shifts to the processing of step S033 at the merging point.

(E. Power supply re-waiting process route (RAM error mode): steps S017 to S020)
Next, with reference to FIG. 6A and FIG. 26A to FIG. In the source code shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, the execution order of the processing according to the RAM error processing route is indicated by a thick arrow and a numeral in the column “when a RAM error occurs”. In the following, in order to avoid redundant description, the description will focus on the processing of steps S017 to S020.

  As described above, the case where the process shifts to the power supply re-waiting process route is as follows. (5AH).

  In the power-on restart processing route, first, power-on power command data (BA07H) is acquired in the DE register (step S017, SPi1), and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT). Transmit (step S018, SPi2). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power-on command, the RAM error notification (power-on instruction effect) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 as "RAM error Power-on and set value to 1". Is displayed, all the effect LEDs are turned off, and the speaker 46 is muted.

  Next, the backup flag BF (W_BACKFLG) is cleared to zero (step S019, SPi3), and the first power supply abnormality check process (_VDDCHK) in FIG. 8 is called and executed (step S020, SPi4).

  However, after the first power supply abnormality check processing of FIG. 8 is executed, the first power supply abnormality check processing is put in a power re-waiting state where the first power supply abnormality check processing is repeated indefinitely (see SPi5). That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the storage contents of the RAM 203, the WDT clearing process (step S701) and the power abnormality checking process (steps S702 to S703) are repeated indefinitely, and the system is placed under a power re-waiting state. I will be. Therefore, if a RAM error occurs when the power is turned on, the processing related to the game progress does not proceed thereafter, and the power is turned on again (in the case of the present embodiment, the setting change management processing in step S023 is executed). Until the game operation stops) (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear processing is executed until the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop processing is repeated. Therefore, if the set value data and the backup data remain damaged, even if the power is turned on again, the damaged data remains, and the setting change processing route is not executed when the power is turned on. As long as this is not the case, that is, when W (1, 1, 1) is set when the power is turned on again, the power-on waiting processing (steps S017 to S020) is executed again. Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error will not be resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, and unless the work area including the set value storage area is cleared by executing the setting change management processing in step S023, Is not resolved. For this reason, in step S017, the power supply re-start command is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 receiving the power-on command informs the liquid crystal display device 36 of "RAM error power supply re-input," as a RAM error notification (power re-start instruction effect). Please determine the setting value to 1 "and the like, and urge the surroundings to eliminate the RAM error.

(∀: Prevention of fraudulent actions related to set values)
By the way, since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, when operating these switches, the front frame 2 (door) must always be opened. Therefore, when the setting change operation or the setting confirmation operation is “regular operation”, the door open signal (door open sensor 61) should always be ON. In other words, the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 94) and the RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98) are ON even though the door opening signal is OFF, that is, the front frame 2 (door) is closed. If it is in the state, it is considered to be 'illegal operation (goto action)'. Particularly, since the level of the set value is a game factor that greatly affects the profit of the pachinko hall and the profit of the player, it is necessary to closely monitor items related to the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least the transition to the “setting change mode” related to the setting change is performed on the condition that “the door is open (the door opening signal is ON)” (“the transfer destination processing route” in FIG. 25). In the 'Change settings' column).

  Also, the current set value is, in principle, kept secret from the player, and if the set value is known to the player, it will have a significant effect on the profit of the pachinko hall, Troubles such as a game table for players may occur. For example, if the player realizes that the setting is a low setting such as setting 1 or 2, the possibility of playing a game with the gaming machine decreases, and not only the operating rate of the gaming machine but also the reputation and reliability of the hall. It has a significant effect on gender. Also, if the players realize that the settings are high, such as the settings 5 and 6, the players will have a game table for each other, which may lead to a big trouble. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the transition to the “setting change mode” but also the transition to the “setting check mode” is based on the condition that “the door is in the open state (door open signal ON)” (FIG. (Refer to the column “Confirmation of setting” in the column “Transfer destination processing route” of No. 25). That is, if the door (front frame 2) is closed (door open signal OFF), neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is entered, so that neither setting change nor setting confirmation can be performed. I have. As a result, using a fraudulent device with the door closed, neutralization of ingenious goto activities that are aimed at secretly changing settings or confirming settings is disabled, and the effect of preventing fraudulent activities is enhanced.

  On the other hand, clearing the RAM and returning to the backup are not related to the setting change, and are considered to have a small effect on the pachinko hall and the profit of the player. Therefore, the transition to the RAM clear mode or the backup recovery mode does not require the ON / OFF state of the door open signal. However, when the RAM clear is executed, the game state returns to the initial state (normal state), and accordingly, the effect mode is initialized, and the history and game settings related to the game are changed. It can be said that the operation can affect the progress of the game. In consideration of this point, the condition that “the door is in the open state (the door open signal is ON)” may be set as a condition even in the transition to the RAM clear mode. In this case, the condition for shifting to the RAM clear mode is only “set key switch signal OFF, door open signal ON, and RAM clear ON (W (x, y, z) = W (0, 1, 1))”. Only the transition to the backup recovery mode is an embodiment in which the ON / OFF state of the door opening signal is not a condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three signals of “setting key switch signal, door opening signal, RAM clear signal” which are the determination information related to the branch determination processing in steps S014, S025, and S026 are transmitted to a specific input port (input port 1). (P_INPT1)), and collectively acquire the states (ON / OFF states) of these signals (see step S067 in FIG. 7, and SPa23 to SPa24 in FIG. 26A), and branch determination processing. In the above, the states of these signals are determined together (uniformly) (simultaneous determination) (see step S014 in FIG. 6A, SPb1 to SPb3 in FIG. 26A, step S026 in FIG. 6B, and SPk1 to SPk2 in FIG. 26B). Has been realized. As a result, the program capacity can be reduced, and the branch determination processing can be simplified to reduce the control load.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the transition to the RAM clear processing route does not use the state of the door open signal as the transition condition (regardless of the state of the signal of the door open signal). It is necessary to determine the state of the switch signal in the setting change branch determination processing in step S014. Since it is known in advance that the remaining seven combinations are out of the eight combinations (the determination result in step S014 is NO), it is determined at least whether or not the RAM clear signal is in the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear signal. (Only the value of the sixth bit of the W register needs to be determined). Also, regarding the transition to the backup restoration processing route, since the state of the door open signal is not a transition condition (irrespective of the state of the signal of the door open signal), the state of the two signals of the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal However, the setting change branch determination process of step S014 and the RAM clear branch determination process of step S025 are executed in advance. In the stage of the setting change branch determination process of step S026, W (x, It is only necessary to determine whether or not (y, z) is W (1, 1, 0). Also from these points, the determination process can be simplified and the control load can be reduced.

<29. Summary of effect control commands transmitted in each processing route: FIG. 29>
FIG. 29 shows the types of effect control commands transmitted in each of the processing routes of “setting change”, “RAM clear”, “setting confirmation”, “backup of backup”, and “wait for re-power-on (RAM error)” and their transmission. It is explanatory drawing which showed the order.

  In FIG. 29, the command types in which the frame is colored in gray are shown as individual command types in each processing route, and the command types in which the frame is white are shown as command types that can be transmitted in common. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the setting change processing route “setting change command (BA5AH) and setting completion command (BA09H)”, the RAM clear processing route “RAM clear command (BA02H)”, the setting confirmation process The “setting confirmation command (E021H) and the setting confirmation end command (E022H)” of the route, and the “power re-waiting command (BA07H)” of the power-on waiting processing route are command types transmitted by the processing route. ing.

  In addition, the "power failure recovery display command (BA03H), the number-of-reserve designation command (B0xxH, B1xxH), and the return-time game state designation command (FAxxH to FExxH)" are transmitted in common through the setting confirmation processing route and the backup recovery processing route. The “spec specification command (F611H) and the customer waiting command (BA04H)” are command types that are commonly transmitted in processing routes other than the re-power-on waiting processing route. . However, the customer waiting command (BA04H) relating to the setting confirmation processing route and the backup restoration processing route is transmitted only during non-change.

  As described above, after the processing according to the combination of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the ON / OFF state of the door open sensor 61 is completed, the process proceeds to the processing of step S033, which is the merging point.

  Referring to FIG. 6B, when the process proceeds to step S033, the contents of all registers are saved, the operation confirmation timer setting process of the out-of-area program is executed, and the saved contents of all registers are restored (steps S033 to S033). S035). In the operation check timer setting process in step S034, necessary initial settings for executing a check operation of whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally are performed. In this confirmation operation, the display mode of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d is repeatedly switched between full lighting and total extinguishing for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). Control to the mode. This makes it possible to check for problems such as turning off lights due to disconnections and missing segments. The process related to the operation confirmation display is executed in a performance display monitor process during a later-described main control timer interrupt process (step S102 in FIG. 16 described later).

  Next, a CTC setting process for periodically generating a timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms (step S036). Thereafter, an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 16 is executed.

  Next, assuming that the state in which the game can be started is completed, a firing control signal (a firing permission signal ES) for permitting the firing operation of the firing device 32 is set from an OFF state (a firing prohibited state) to an ON state (a firing permitted state) (step). S037). Thereby, the launching operation is permitted thereafter, and if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, the launch of the game ball becomes possible. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, before the CTC setting process (step S036) is executed, the emission control signal is controlled to the prohibition state (see step S054 in FIG. 7). Therefore, the firing operation is prohibited at least until each processing of the setting change, the setting confirmation, the in-area RAM clear, and the backup restoration processing route is completed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the careless firing operation from being executed during the setting change or the setting confirmation.

  In the present embodiment, the ejection control signal from the main control unit 20 is received by the payout control board 29, and the discharge control board 28 allows the firing operation. The configuration is such that the emission control board 28 is indirectly controlled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described firing control signal may be directly output to the firing control board 28 to allow the firing operation.

  Next, the game start command data (BA77H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) described above (steps S038, S039). When the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it performs an initial operation (initialization operation) relating to a movable object such as a clock-type accessory 80 or a flower-type accessory 90. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decoration lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation exclusively works as an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable object.

  Then, when a series of power-on processing (steps S011 to S039: pre-game start processing) is completed, an infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 of the game processing related to normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled to a state in which the game can proceed (a state in which the game can be started).

(Game processing related to normal game progress: loop processing of S040 to S045)
When the processing in step S039 ends, the processing enters a loop processing in steps S040 to S045. Here, first, in a state where the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040), various random number updating processes are executed (step S041). In the various random number updating process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by the increment process) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a random number for a special symbol determination used in a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (a random number for an auxiliary hit determination used in a per-assistance lottery, a normal symbol determination used in a symbol lottery for an auxiliary The random number used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random number (initial value random number for special symbol judgment, initial value random number for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.) and the random number for the variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern Update.

  After the above-described various random number update processing (step S041) is completed, all the registers are saved in the stack area (step S042), and the processing performance display monitor aggregation / division processing required for calculating the base value of the program outside the area is executed ( In step S043, all registers are restored (step S044).

  Here, the test is performed until the total number of out-states reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299) from when the power is first turned on (at the time of shipment) or when the RAM outside the area is all cleared (when the RAM is cleared due to a base value counting error). As a section, only the number of all state outs is counted, and the base value and the like are not measured. This is in consideration of conducting an operation test when a gaming machine is first installed in a pachinko hall. It is necessary to exclude prize balls and out balls by such an operation test from measurement targets. Therefore, the first (first) measurement is started after the end of the test section. During the test section, when a real-time base value is displayed in order to notify that the current measurement is a test section, “bL.” Flashes on the identification display section and “bL. --- "is lit. When displaying the history base value, “b6.” Flashes on the identification display unit, and “−−” is lit on the base display unit.

  When the total number of out-of-states reaches a predetermined number (here, 60000) from the start of the first (first) measurement, the base value at this point (first base value) is displayed in the performance display of the RAM 203. It is stored in the storage area, and the current normal payout number, normal time out number, and all state out number are each cleared to zero for the second measurement. That is, every time the specified number of 60000 pieces are counted, the current base value is stored, and the normal number of payouts, the number of normal outs, and the total number of outs during measurement are stored for the next base value measurement. Clear to zero. At the time of the first measurement, since the history base value is not stored, when displaying the real-time base value, "bL. **" ('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed, and the history base value is displayed. When displaying a value, "b6 .--" is displayed. However, the identification display section “b6.” Is configured to blink to notify that it is the first measurement.

  Then, after the performance display monitor tallying / dividing process is completed, all registers are restored (step S044), an interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), and the process returns to step S040. Is repeated (main loop processing). The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processing and performance display monitor tallying / dividing processing except during execution of a timer interrupt processing which is executed intermittently.

<16. Main control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 16>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interrupt process. The main control timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (approximately 4 ms), and is executed during execution of the main control main process.

  In FIG. 16, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check processing without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In the power supply abnormality check processing, as shown in FIG. 17 described later, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and a backup processing is performed when a power supply abnormality occurs. Therefore, the second power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup unit that retains the stored contents of the RAM (here, the RAM within the area) even after the power is turned off.

  Next, a timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers used for controlling the gaming operation of the gaming machine 1 are updated here.

  Next, an input management process is executed (step S083). Detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the gaming machine 1 and input information of a state signal from the payout control board 29 (information on an ON / OFF signal, information on a rising state (ON edge, OFF edge), etc.) Based on this, input data is created or the winning counter is updated. Note that the number of out-balls is managed in the process related to the performance information of the out-of-area program (step S043 in FIG. 6B, step S102 described later).

  Next, a setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting error check processing, it is determined whether or not the set value data (W_SETTEI) is normal, and based on the result of the determination, an error process relating to the set value is executed. The details of the setting error check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a timer interrupt random number management process is executed (step S085). In the timer interrupt random number management process, the random number related to each variable display game is periodically updated. More specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, soft random numbers such as a special symbol judgment random number and an auxiliary hit judgment random number are updated with a random number (+1 is added for each interruption) and a random number is added. Every time the counter makes one round, a process of changing the start value of the random number counter is executed.

  Next, an error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormal) has occurred in the game operation based on detection information relating to various switches and sensors, a status signal from the payout control board 29, and the like. In this case, an error process corresponding to the error type is executed. In the error management process, a process of transmitting an error command (a command including error type information) corresponding to the error type to the effect control unit 24, a process of transmitting an error release command when the error is cleared, and a specific error occur. In this case, a process such as a forced stop control process of the game operation is included.

  Next, a prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management processing, the above-mentioned prize counter is confirmed, and if there is a prize, a payout control command designating the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated prize ball number.

  Next, a normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In the normal symbol management process, a process necessary for the normal symbol variable display game (normal symbol variable display operation) is executed. Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, and when a game ball is detected, predetermined game information (such as a random number for judging an auxiliary hit) necessary for a lottery per auxiliary is detected. The game information is acquired (general-purpose random number acquisition process), and the game information is retained as the pending data (general-purpose operation reserve sphere) up to the maximum number of reserved storages (here, four) (general-purpose reserve storage process). Then, when the predetermined fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary winning lottery is performed based on the ordinary figure operation holding ball, and a variation pattern of a normal symbol is selected based on the result of the auxiliary winning lottery, and a stop display mode (normal stop) of the ordinary symbol is performed. Pattern) is determined. Also, here, in order to make the normal design perform the variable display operation, the LED display data for variable display is created if the symbol is changing, and the LED display data for stop display is created if the symbol is not changing (normal). Symbol display data update processing).

  Next, a normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, a process necessary for executing a normal electricity opening game is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a hit, a setting process of solenoid control data for the ordinary electric auditors product solenoid 41c is executed. On the basis of the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c in a solenoid management process of step S100 described later. Controlled.

  Next, a special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, a process necessary for a special symbol variation display game (variable symbol display operation) is mainly performed. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, a process necessary for controlling execution of a hit game is executed. The details of the special electric auditors product management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In the right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game state is “a right-handed advantage” (in the present embodiment, during a hit game, a time-saving state, and a probable change state). The LED data for turning off the right-hand display device 39b is created when the game state is "under the left-handed advantage" (normal state).

  Next, an LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management processing, output control of a control signal (dynamic lighting data) to the LED display devices of the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right-hand display device 39b is executed. The control signal based on the LED display data created in the ordinary symbol management process (step S091), the special symbol management process (step S093), and the right strike notification information management process (step S097) is output in the LED management process. Is done.

  Next, an external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management processing, various external end signals are generated through the frame external terminal board 21 and output control is performed on external devices such as the data counter DT and the hall computer HC.

  Next, a solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the special winning opening solenoid 52c are set based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094). On the other hand, output control of the excitation signal is executed. Thereby, the opening / closing operation of the lower starting port 35 and the special winning port 50 is realized.

  Next, in order to execute the performance display monitoring process of the program outside the area, all the registers are saved, and after executing the performance display monitoring process, all the registers are restored (steps S101 to S103). In the performance display monitor process, based on the display control of the performance display 99, the monitoring of the presence / absence of an abnormality relating to the calculation of the base value, and the input data relating to the presence / absence of a prize for each winning port related to the performance display, based on the switch input data acquired in step S083. Perform necessary processing related to base value calculation such as creation. The data created here is used in the performance display monitor tallying / dividing process (step S043 in FIG. 6B) in the main control-side main process, which has already been described, in the normal number of payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value, and the total state. Used to count outs.

  Next, the WDT count value is cleared (step S104). Thereby, the WDT is reset, and the count value is returned to the initial value.

  When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing ends, and the main control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<17. Second power supply abnormality check processing: FIG. 17>
Next, the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the second power supply abnormality check processing.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first obtains input information of a power failure signal indicating a power interruption from an external signal input register (PINSTS) (step S711). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signal match twice consecutively (step S712), and the processes of steps S711 to S712 are repeated until the levels match. When the levels of the power supply abnormality signal match (step S712: YES), it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S713).

  If the power supply abnormality signal is not at the abnormality level (step S713: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S723), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S724), and the process exits the second power supply abnormality check process.

  On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is at the abnormality level (step S713: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S714), and whether the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after the addition has reached the upper limit value Y is determined. It is determined whether or not it is (step S715). This is in consideration of the possibility that the acquired data from the external signal input register (PINSTS) may be garbled due to the influence of noise or the like, and the acquired data continuously maintains the abnormal level. When the upper limit Y (for example, Y = 2) is reached, it is determined that the AC power supply has actually been cut off.

  If the value of the power supply abnormality check counter has reached the upper limit Y (step S715: YES), it is determined that a power supply abnormality has occurred, and backup processing is executed. Specifically, the power supply abnormality check counter is cleared (step S716), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S717), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S718). The backup flag BF may be set to the ON state, a checksum operation for calculating the checksum value may be executed, and the operation result may be stored in a predetermined area (SUM storage area) of the RAM 203. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. The checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of power interruption is maintained by a backup power supply together with other data of the RAM 203. In a case where the checksum is stored at the time of this backup, a part of the RAM error determination processing (see steps S015 to S016 in FIG. 6A) described above, or instead of steps S015 to S016, “checksum determination processing” Can be provided. In this case, in the checksum determination process, the checksum at the time of power restoration is calculated, and the calculated checksum value is compared with the checksum value stored in the SUM storage area at the time of power failure. In this case, the power supply re-waiting processing (RAM error processing) in steps S017 to S020 is executed, and if the comparison results match, the processing may be advanced.

  If a power interruption occurs during the setting change management already described (step S023 in FIG. 6A), the main control-side timer interrupt processing is before activation (before executing step S036 in FIG. 6B). 2 The power supply abnormality check processing is not executed and the backup processing cannot be performed. In this case, if a power failure occurs after the backup flag BF is cleared to zero in step S901 during setting change management, it is determined that a RAM error has occurred at the next power restoration (determination in step S016 in FIG. 6A). If the result is NO (BF @ 5AH), the processing shifts to the power supply re-waiting processing route (steps S017 to S020 in FIG. 6A), and the power re-supply wait state is controlled.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, when the processing of step S718 is completed, next, power-off command data (BA33H) is acquired, and the acquired command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by command transmission processing (_CMDOUT) ( Step S719). The power-off command (BA33H) is an effect control command for specifying that a power failure has occurred. The power-off command includes a power-off A command and a power-off B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is continuously transmitted in every 8 bits in this order. Such a configuration is employed to prevent the power interruption state from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

  Next, 01H is set in the RAM protect register (RAMPT), and "RAM access prohibited area invalid, RAM protect valid" is set, and data writing to RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing (step S720). Then, the output data of all the output ports are cleared (step S721). As a result, it is possible to prevent the RAM from being rewritten abnormally due to, for example, the reading of an illegal address in the RAM due to the voltage drop. Irrational data transmission to the substrate 29 can be prevented.

  Then, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting process for the CTC, and the CPU is set to the interrupt prohibition (step S722). wait.

<18. Setting abnormality check processing: FIG. 18>
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the setting abnormality check processing (step S084) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the setting error check processing.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), that is, whether or not a RAM error (setting error) (step S731). If the setting error flag is ON (step S731: = 5AH), the process exits from the setting error check processing without doing anything. On the other hand, if the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S731: $ 5AH), the setting value Nc is acquired from the setting value storage area (W_SETTEI) of the RAM in the area, and the value is set to a normal value (corresponding to the setting values 1 to 6). Is determined (step S732). This determination process is a process common to the content of the determination processes of steps S903 and S913 in the setting change management process of FIG.

  If the acquired setting value Nc is not any of 00H to 05H (step S732: NO), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the setting value data, and the setting error flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S733). Then, the setting value abnormal command data (0E33H) is obtained (Step S734), and the obtained command data is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the command transmission process (_CMDOUT) (Step S735), and the process exits from the setting error checking process. . When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting value abnormality command, the effect control unit 24 performs setting abnormality error notification (RAM error notification) using the effect means. For example, the decoration lamp 45 is fully illuminated in red, and an error display such as “RAM error, please call a staff” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. The case in which the game is being executed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18, 20, and 21.

<19. Special symbol management processing: FIG. 19>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process.

  In FIG. 19, first, the CPU 201 performs a “special figure 1 starting port check process” for the special symbol 1 side (upper starting port 34 side) (step S301), and subsequently, the special symbol 2 side (lower starting port 35 side). A “special figure 2 starting port check process” is executed (step S302). The details of the special figure 1 starting port check processing and the special figure 2 starting port check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the start-up opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit flag is determined (step S303). The "small hitting flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a small hitting game is being performed. When the flag is ON (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hitting game is being performed. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress.

  If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: $ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). The “condition device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S304: $ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: $ 5AH and step S304: $ 5AH), special According to the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), a process related to the special symbol change display operation is executed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if a small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5AH) or a big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5AH), the processing related to the special symbol fluctuating display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed, and is left as it is. The process proceeds to a special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is being performed, the special symbol change display operation is not performed. That is, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is maintained as being fixedly displayed with the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, the special symbol operation status depends on which of the status values “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)”, and “confirming (03H)”. Then, the processing of steps S306 to S308 corresponding to each is executed. By these processes, the variable display operation for setting the start and stop of the change of the special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol change start process (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22A to 22B.

  When any of the above-described steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data updating process in step S309 described below is performed. In this special symbol display data updating process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing. If the special symbol is changing, the data of the special symbol which repeats blinking at a predetermined time interval (the changing 7-segment blinking display data). ) Is created, and if the special symbol is not fluctuating, stop display data (7-segment blinking display data during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 16, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. When the special symbol display data updating process is completed, the process exits the special symbol management process and executes the special electric accessory management process of step S095 in FIG.

(20. Special figure 1 starting port check process: Fig. 20)
Referring to FIG. 20, the special figure 1 start-up opening check process (step S301 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process. This special figure 1 starting port check processing serves as a prize-winning processing that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and is mainly a processing relating to a hold storage when a game ball has won the upper starting port 34. And processing related to a prefetch notice effect (hold addition command). In addition, the special figure 1 starting port check processing and the special figure 2 starting port check processing differ only in whether the processing contents relate to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The contents are substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, the following description will focus on the special figure 1 starting port check process.

  In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (special figure 1 starting port) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation reserved balls is less than the maximum reserved storage number (here, four). If the winning detection of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the process exits the special figure 1 starting port check processing without doing anything.

  In the case where the number of operation-reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning that exceeds the maximum number of stored storages occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for specifying the over-winning (in the case of the special figure 1) B006H, or B106H in the case of the special figure 2) to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation pending ball number is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation pending ball number (step S313), and step S314 is performed. Proceed to processing.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol change display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, and the random number for fluctuation pattern are obtained from various random number counters, and the obtained random numbers are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information relating to the symbol variation display game as an operation reserved ball (reserved data). In the reserved storage area, the various random numbers as the reserved data are stored in a special symbol. Until the change display operation 1 is performed (until the special symbol change display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 (a special symbol 1 reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved storage area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These hold storage areas are provided with a hold 1 storage area to a hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of operation-holding balls: n = 4 in this embodiment), and hold data for each of the maximum number of operation-holding balls is provided. Can be stored.

  Next, as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a hold addition command (details will be described later), look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) that prohibits pre-read determination. )) (Step S315), and determines whether or not the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S316). The "special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the prefetching determination for the special figure 1 operation-holding ball (prohibiting the prefetching advance notice). In this embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation-holding sphere can be generated with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation-holding sphere, "under the state with electric support", it is determined that "special figure 1 pre-reading is prohibited". If the special figure 1 operation-holding ball can be generated with a higher probability than the operation-holding ball in FIG. In the determination processing of step S316, if the current gaming state is a gaming state accompanied by a state with power support (a time saving state or a probable change state), the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”. .

  If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to prefetching determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to step S322 described later. In this case, the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation pending ball is not performed, and a pending addition command having prefetch inhibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is prohibited (the look-ahead notice effect for the current operation pending ball is not executed).

  If the special figure 1 prefetching prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), it is then determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S317). If the setting error flag is ON (step S317: = 5AH), that is, if a RAM error (setting error) has occurred, the process related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the steps described later are performed. The process proceeds to S322. Also in this case, the look-ahead determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed, a hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibited data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created, and the look-ahead announcement effect is not executed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data designating that the processing related to the pre-read determination (steps S318 to S321) is not executed.

  If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: $ 5AH), a setting value command is transmitted, and a random number determination process (winning hit random number determination process) is executed (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'pre-read determination' process. In this example, the “random winning lottery at the start of the change (described later) performed when the current operation-holding ball is provided for the change display operation (See step S410 in FIG. 21) is performed in advance.

(Setting value command)
The “setting value command” includes information that can specify the current setting value, and is used when the effect control unit 24 performs the appearance control of a notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the setting value. Is done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation pending ball is generated in the start-up opening check process. Thus, the effect control unit 24 can perform the appearance control of a notice effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect related to a prefetch notice effect) related to the operation-holding ball based on the correct set value information.

  In the random number determination processing in step S318, first, a hit random number determination table (not shown) is obtained, and a big hit determination random number value is obtained. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table, a win lottery (prefetch hit determination) for the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (prefetch hit result) is obtained.

  The hit random number determination table is provided with a hit random number determination table corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation reserve ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation reserve ball (special symbol variation display game 2). I have. During the special figure 1 starting port check processing, the "special figure 1 required random number determination table" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 starting port check processing, the "special figure 2 required random number determination table" is referenced. The hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in a "random number determination process for determining a special electric auditors product operation (step S410 in FIG. 21)" described later.

  In these hit random number determination tables, the hit type (big hit, small hit or lost) is determined for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability) and low probability state (low probability)). Area (judgment value) for the jackpot is determined in association with the random number for jackpot determination (the size of the random number for jackpot determination: 65536). Specifically, the random number for jackpot determination Is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to Therefore, even if the acquired random numbers for jackpot determination belong to the same determination value, one of the "big jackpot lottery probabilities (operating probability of the condition device)" is determined depending on whether the current probability is a high probability or a low probability. The hit type may be different, such as "big hit" and "losing".

  In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number judgment table is provided with a hit judgment table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the lottery probability of the big hit differs according to the settings 1 to 6). Have been. In the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability (probability change ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same for each set value, and the ratio is 10 It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 “1/320 at low probability, 1/32 at high probability”, setting 5 “1/330 at low probability, 1/33 at high probability”,. 390, high probability 1/39 ”and setting 1“ low probability 1/410, high probability 1/41 ”to win a big hit.

  Instead of providing a hit determination table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6), a common hit determination table may be provided for a part of each set value. For example, a common “low setting random number determination table” for settings 1 and 2; a setting 3 “random number determination table for setting 3”; The common "high setting use random number determination table" and the like. In this case, the common hit random number determination table is referred to for some of the setting values (in this example, setting 1 and setting 2 and setting 5 and setting 6), and the profit degree (payout rate) is the same for the settings. In other words, the setting can be made not in six steps but in less than six steps. In this example, the substantial setting can be made “four steps”. As described above, by using the hit random number determination table with a part of the setting values, even in the case of the model having the six-stage setting as in the present embodiment, the actual setting can be reduced to less than six stages. . Even when the common hit random number determination table is referred to, if the symbol selection rate of each hit type is set to a different probability for each set value, the original six-step setting can be made.

  When the random number determination processing in step S318 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation processing is executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the 'read-ahead determination' process. “Lottery (see step S411 in FIG. 21 described later)” is performed in advance to perform a “read-ahead symbol determination”.

  In the special stop symbol data creation process, a "symbol table (not shown) corresponding to the prefetching hit result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to be processed this time is used. ) ". Then, the special symbol determination random number value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and the symbol lottery (pre-reading) for the current operation holding ball is performed based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random number value. Symbol determination), and obtains the lottery result (read-ahead symbol result).

  The "symbol table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "losing symbol table" for determining a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided corresponding to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of change in a special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 21) described later.

  In the symbol table, a determination area (determination value) for determining a hit type (symbol type) and a random number for special symbol determination (for example, the size of the random number for special symbol determination: 200) are determined in association with each other. More specifically, the winning type is determined in accordance with a predetermined symbol selection rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number value belongs to. In the present embodiment, special symbol determination data and a special stop symbol number are acquired as data indicating the lottery result.

  The "special symbol determination data" is data for identifying a winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and specifically, big hits 1 to 11 and small hits shown in FIG. 1. Data for identifying which of the losses A to C (not shown) has been won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process of step S412 in FIG. 21 to be described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process of step S413, and a process related to execution control of a big hit game). (The special electric accessory management processing of Fig. 23) etc. The "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. It is used when specifying the special symbol type of the special symbol on the side of the main control unit 20. In the same way as the special symbol, the normal symbol determination data is used as the symbol determination data, and the normal symbol determination data is used as the stop symbol number. A stop symbol number is provided.

  If there is only one winning type to be selected, the symbol table need not be provided. For example, when the type of the loss is one type of the loss A, the loss A may be determined as the winning type without providing the loss symbol table (without performing the symbol lottery) and if the winning result is a loss. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 4, the special figure 2 side has a higher selection rate of the big hit type that gives a relatively higher profit than the special figure 1 side, and is a symbol lottery that is advantageous for the player. Thus, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery for the special symbol variation display game 2 than for the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower starting port 35 side is remarkably improved, and the opportunity to execute the special symbol change display game 2 is also increased. In addition to this, the gaming state is advantageous for the player from the viewpoint of symbol lottery.

Note that a common symbol table may be determined for all settings, or a symbol table according to the settings may be determined. In this case, it can be configured as follows.
(A) In some or all of the settings, the symbol selection rates of one or more winning types are different. For example, regarding the symbol lottery rates of the big hits 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 4, in the case of the setting 1, “7%, 4%, 35%, 13%”, and in the case of the setting 6, “15%, 5%, 30%, 12% ".
(B) In all or a part of each setting, the probability change intrusion rate (symbol selection rate of jackpot which triggers the transition to the probability change and / or latent) differs. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability-change inrush rate is 65% (the ratio of latent and probability-variable hits is 65%, and the ratio of time-saving big hits is 35%). Can set the certainty inrush rate to 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the certainty inrush rate can be set to 65%. The same applies to the time saving entry rate (symbol selection rate of a big hit that triggers a shift to time saving).
In any case, as the setting becomes higher, the payout performance may be determined so as to be more advantageous for the player.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 is completed, a start-up winning random number determination process is then performed (step S320). The random determination processing at the time of starting opening winning is also performed as a part of the 'look-ahead determination' processing. A “pattern lottery (see step S413 in FIG. 21 described later)” is performed in advance to perform a “prefetch variation pattern determination”.

  When the process enters the random number determination process at the time of starting winning, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318), the result of the pre-reading symbol determination obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319), and the acquisition At least using the fluctuation pattern random number (step S314), the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation relating to the current operation-holding ball, that is, the special pattern executed when the current operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation The result of the symbol variation pattern creation process (see S413 in FIG. 21 described later) is prefetched and determined. Then, based on the result of the prefetch determination, a process of creating and updating the winning command data 1 (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating the hold addition command is executed. As a result, before entering the present process, the pre-read prohibition data “9FH” (see step S 315) is updated in the present process to a data value specifying the content of the pre-read variation pattern (excluding the information on the number of reserved balls). The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern include, for example, normal variation, N-reach loss, weak SP reach loss, medium SP reach loss, strong SP reach loss, N reach hit, weak SP reach hit, medium SP reach hit, strong SP reach hit, and 2R latent. Includes certainty / small hit designation. In addition, the winning expectation related to the prefetch variation pattern is higher in this order, and the higher the expectation degree is, the higher the probability of winning by the prefetch notice lottery is relatively increased.

  After a series of pre-reading determination processes in steps S318 to S321 described above, subsequently, winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired based on the current number of active balls and the special symbol type (FIG. 1). "B6H to B9H" is obtained according to one to four operation-holding balls, and "BBH to BEH" is obtained according to one to four operation-holding balls. Based on the command data 2 (MODE) and the upper entry prize command data 1 (prefetch variation pattern designation information) on the lower byte (EVENT) side, a “pending addition command” is created (step S322) and stored in the RAM 203. Without doing this (hereinafter, the data relating to the hold addition command is unnecessary), and transmits it to the effect control unit 24 (step S323). Therefore, the pending addition command includes the prefetch determination result information (information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern) obtained in a series of processes related to the prefetch determination (steps S318 to S320), and the special figure 1 activation pending ball information or the special figure. 2 is included. However, in the case of the pre-reading prohibition condition or when an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the pre-reading prohibition data “9FH” is maintained as it is. (Refer to the processing route in which the determination result in step S315 is NO and the determination result in S316 is NO.)

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the command and, if the information included in the hold addition command is other than the designation of prohibition of prefetching, determines whether or not the prefetch notice effect is executable. If a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed and a winner is won, a pre-reading notice effect production scenario is created, and based on the scenario, a pre-read notice effect (hold change notice effect and fluctuation) At the start, the continuous announcement effect) appears.

  Further, if the information included in the hold addition command is “prefetch prohibition designation”, the effect control unit 24 does not execute the prefetch advance notice lottery, or forcibly sets the prefetch advance notice lottery as a loss, and generates the prefetch advance effect. Ban. Note that, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not a setting abnormality error has occurred, the hold addition command of designating prohibition of read-ahead is transmitted. The reason is as follows.

  In the case of this embodiment, even if a setting error occurs, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled. The first reason is that the setting error can be eliminated by performing the setting change operation as described above. However, the setting change operation during business is a matter that encourages eagerness from the viewpoint of legal requirements. Is likely to fall under the prohibited matter. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting error occurs, the player may have a distrust of suddenly stopping the game. For example, when a symbol change display game in progress is executed during a normal operation, or during a big hit game, a setting abnormal error occurs by chance, and the game is immediately controlled to a state in which the game cannot be performed. In such a case, the profit that should be obtained by the player is lost, resulting in the player's distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the progress of the game itself is conditional, but proceeds as it is. The expression “although with conditions” is used to prohibit the advance reading notice or to forcibly lose the result of the symbol variation display game when a setting error occurs (FIG. 20). Step S317 during the start-up opening check process, and step S409 during the special symbol change start process in FIG. 21 described later). The reason for proceeding the game as it is "conditionally" is that when a setting error occurs, stop the error notification and if no other measures are taken, the effect control processing This is because the jackpot lottery may not be executed correctly.

<21. Special symbol change start process: FIG. 21>
Next, the special symbol change start process (step S306) in FIG. 19 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start process.

  In FIG. The CPU 201 First, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 operation pending ball count is zero (step S401), If the special figure 2 operation pending ball count is not zero (step S401: NO) The process (Steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the special figure 2 operation reserved ball count is executed. on the other hand, When the special figure 2 operation pending ball count is zero (step S401: YES), Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 operation pending balls is zero (step S402), If the special figure 1 operation pending ball count is not zero (step S402: NO) The process at the start of the change for the special figure 1 operation pending ball count (steps S403 to S416) is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, The "priority change order" of which of the special figure 1 operation-holding ball and the special figure 2 operation-holding ball is preferentially subjected to the change display operation (which operation holding ball is used) is determined. In this embodiment, If there is an operation reserve ball in both the special figure 1 operation reserve ball and the special figure 2 operation reserve ball, Special drawing 2 The operation reserve ball is digested preferentially.

  When both the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 2 and the number of operation reserved balls in the special figure 1 are zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation reserved ball". Becomes The state of "no operation holding ball" is a case where the special symbol is on standby and no state of holding the memory is held. Then, when it becomes "no operation pending ball", the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "standby (00H)" indicating the state of "above operation pending ball" ( Step S417).

  When the special symbol operation status at the time of the above-mentioned "no operation pending ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 22A described later) The special symbol operation status is switched to "standby (00H)" (step S418). Then, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as the effect control command (step S419), and the process exits the special symbol change start process. As described above, when 180 seconds have elapsed without a game being started after receiving the customer waiting command, the effect control unit 24 displays a demonstration start waiting effect and then displays a customer waiting effect. .

  If the special figure 1 operation reserved ball number or the special figure 2 operation reserved ball number is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that the method of processing in steps S403 to S416 described below is substantially different only in whether the target is a special figure 1 operation reserve ball or a special figure 2 operation reserve ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid redundant description, unless there is a particular need, the description will be made without distinguishing which operation pending ball is the process.

  In step S403, the number of operation-reserved balls on the special figure side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is decremented by 1 (step S403), and a "reserve subtraction command" including the operation-reserved ball number information after the subtraction is produced. (Step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating a special symbol type on the fluctuation start side this time, and is “00H” if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1 is read, and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , The hold data stored in the hold storage areas corresponding to the hold n storage areas (n = 2, 3, 4) are respectively stored in the hold storage areas corresponding to “n−1” (step S406). 4) Clear the storage area to provide an empty area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number n of the operation-holding balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding ball acquired at the time of winning the starting opening wins any of the holding storages. Whether or not it corresponds to the area is specified, and a new operation-holding ball can be held and stored.

  Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission processing, a state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This state command includes at least game state information capable of specifying the current game state, and in the present embodiment, special symbol time reduction counter information (remaining time reduction information). By this state command, the effect control unit 24 grasps whether or not the transition of the game state has occurred in the current game, and controls the transition of the effect mode and the remaining time reduction display effect for displaying the remaining time reduction of the time reduction state. An effect control such as an effect control in an effect mode according to the current game state is effected.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is ON (5AH) (step S409). If the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: $ 5AH), a setting value command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then a special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is executed (step S410). In the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process, a 当 winning lottery at the start of the change ’is performed on the operation-holding ball used for the current change display operation by using the random number value for the big hit determination. The processing procedure of the special electric auditors product operation determination random number determination process is substantially the same as the random number determination process of step S318 described above, and thus will be appropriately omitted and described to avoid redundant description.

  Here, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, a hit random number determination table for the current processing target side (for example, if the special figure 1 side is a processing target, a winning random number table for the special figure 1) is acquired. Next, the random number value for big hit determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is obtained, and a winning lottery based on the random number value for big hit determination and the hit random number determination table is executed. If the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit determination flag is set to "5AH". If the small hit is won, the small hit determination flag is set to "5AH". If none of the "hits" is won, that is, if "losing", "00H" is set in both the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag.

  In the special stop symbol creation process of step S411, the winning symbol lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the special electronic object operation determination random number determination process of step S410 are used to make a “symbol lottery” of the present special symbol variation display game. Is performed. The basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation processing is substantially the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing of step S319, which has been described above.

  Here, first, a symbol table (any one of a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, and a lost symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result of the special electronic object operation determination random number determination process. I do. For example, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the big hit determination flag is 5AH, that is, if the current fluctuation start side is “special figure 1 side” and the winning lottery result is “big hit”, One big hit symbol table is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is obtained, and a symbol lottery is executed based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, and a special symbol as a result of the lottery is obtained. The determination data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the in-area RAM.

  When the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is executed (step S412). In this game state transition preparation processing, when a big hit is won, it is necessary to specify the game state after the big hit game (see FIG. 4) based on the current game state and the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Various data are stored in corresponding areas (transition state buffers) of the intra-area RAM. The data set here is used in a jackpot ending process (step S509 in FIG. 23) described later.

  After the game state transition preparation processing of step S412 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation processing is executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, a variation pattern distribution table (not shown) corresponding to the current game state, the set value, and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) of the special stop symbol creation process is acquired. .

  In the variation pattern distribution table, one or more types of variation patterns include the number of operation pending balls (the number of existing operation pending balls, excluding the operation pending ball used for the current variation display operation), the symbol lottery result, and It is determined in association with the random number value for the fluctuation pattern (the size of the random number value: 10000). Specifically, a predetermined selection rate (variation pattern lottery) is determined based on which determination value the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to. ), Any one of the fluctuation patterns is determined. In the case of this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns include normal fluctuation types (normal fluctuation 2 s, normal fluctuation 8 s, normal fluctuation 12 s, etc.), N reach types (N reach 1, 2, etc.), SP Reach types (weak SP reach, SP reach, strong SP reach, etc.) are specified, and reach variation patterns that specify various reaches other than the normal variation type are included as hit variation patterns. In addition, in the case of the normal fluctuation type and the N-reach type, one or two pseudo runs are specified, and in the SP reach type, there are one in which the pseudo run is specified one to five times (five times are probable). Therefore, if the pseudo run occurs three times, it is determined that the SP reach is performed.

  Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided with the fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, the probability that one or a plurality of specific fluctuation patterns will be selected by lot depends on the set value. Therefore, even if the selection conditions of the variation pattern (the number of active balls, the symbol lottery result, and the random number for the variation pattern) are the same, the same variation pattern is not always selected, but is selected according to the set value. There are cases where the variation patterns are different (even for the same variation pattern, the selectivity differs according to the set value). For example, the selection rate of the strong reach in the case of the number of active balls 3 and the loss C is “290/10000” in the case of the setting 1, but “580/10000” in the case of the setting 6 and the like. By providing a fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to such set values, a “special fluctuation pattern” that can be selected only in a high setting area (settings 5 to 6) is provided, or a specific set value (for example, even number setting) Depending on (settings 2, 4, 6) and odd number settings (1, 3, 5), one or more types of variation patterns having different selectivities can be determined. For example, when a notice effect (for example, a special reach effect, a special change display effect) corresponding to the above-described special fluctuation pattern appears, it is definitely determined that the current setting value is in the high setting area. Be informed. It can be said that such a variation pattern is one mode of the setting suggestion effect (“reach appearance rate change” of the setting suggestion effect 12) described later.

  The information on the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least a winning lottery result (in the case of the present embodiment, the symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), a current game state, fluctuation time information, Execution specification information of a specific notice effect (presence or absence of reach effect and its type (normal fluctuation, N reach, SP reach (including its type)), pseudo run designation information (including the number of pseudo runs), setting value related Information and the like. The main control unit 20 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that allows the content to be specified, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the change pattern designation command is used when determining various effects (notification effect during change, setting suggestion effect during change) to appear during the current pattern change display game. Also, the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is a timer management area of the RAM in the area, and the execution time of the current symbol change display game is determined.

  Next, the changing flag corresponding to the current change start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "fluctuating flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is ON (= 5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In the present embodiment, a “special symbol 1 changing flag” corresponding to special figure 1 and a “special symbol 2 changing flag” corresponding to special figure 2 are handled. For example, if the special figure 1 is the current processing target (the fluctuation start side), the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

  Next, a decoration symbol designation command corresponding to the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process of step S411 is acquired, and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designating command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating the special symbol type on the variable side and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating the winning type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the changing side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). The decorative symbol designating command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming the reach state (a symbol type that constitutes the reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbols), and a symbol. It is also used when performing a preliminary announcement effect corresponding to the winning type and a setting suggestion effect using a listening tile symbol described later in the variable display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the change pattern designation command and the decorative design designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the present design variation display game effect based on the information included in these commands.

  Then, as the setting process at the start of the change, the special symbol operation status is switched to “variing (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the random number storage area for determination (step S416). ).

  As described above, after exiting the special symbol change start process, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 19 is performed, and thus the special symbol change display is started. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG.

(For the case where a setting error has occurred: the processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination processing in step S409, the processing content in the case where it is determined in step S409 that the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, in the case where it is determined that a setting error has occurred, will be described. I do.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting error flag is determined to be in the ON state in the determination processing of step S409, the above-described random number determination processing for special electric auditors product operation determination (winning lottery) is skipped, and the special stop of step S411 is performed. The process proceeds to a symbol creation process. That is, when a setting error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of the fluctuation is not performed, and the result of the current winning lottery is always "losing" (forced loss control).

  Therefore, in the case of a setting error, the symbol lottery is executed in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 based on the result of the winning lottery being "losing". Here, also in the case of a setting error, the loss type (one of the losses A to C in the present embodiment) may be determined using the loss symbol table as usual. A loss type (for example, loss D) that is selected only (not normally selected) may be provided and determined. In this case, at the time of the setting error, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding to the loss D are determined as the symbol lottery result, and are displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b during normal operation. No special stop symbols will be stopped and displayed. The error-specific loss D may be shared by the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or the error-specific loss (a loss D1 corresponding to the special figure 1 and a loss D2 corresponding to the special figure 2) according to the special symbol type. ) May be provided. When no error-specific loss is provided, a specific loss (for example, loss A) may be selected from among the losses A to C that are normally selected.

(Selection of fluctuation pattern at setting error)
Next, a special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S411) is executed. During the abnormal setting error, the same variation pattern lottery as in the normal case is not performed, but the “variation for setting error” is selected only when the setting error occurs. The pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table for setting abnormalities) is referred to, and a fluctuation pattern dedicated to an abnormal setting error is selected.

  In the present embodiment, in consideration of the fact that “losing” is forcibly determined during a setting error, a notice effect with a low degree of tilt is selected in the “setting error fluctuation pattern distribution table”. It has a table configuration. For example, a table configuration capable of selecting the following fluctuation patterns (W) to (G) can be used.

Configuration (W): At least a reach variation pattern is not selected.
Configuration (f): At least a reach variation pattern that specifies a specific reach is not selected. For example, a normal fluctuation and a fluctuation pattern designating N-reach are selected as selection targets, but a fluctuation pattern specifying a high-expected SP reach is not selected.
Configuration (Y): At least the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-represented variation pattern are not selected. In other words, only the normal fluctuation pattern is selected.
In the case of this configuration (Y), for example, one of a plurality of types of normal fluctuation patterns (normal fluctuation 2 s, normal fluctuation 8 s, and normal fluctuation 12 s in this embodiment) that can be selected during normal operation can be selected. Can be configured. Alternatively, only a specific normal fluctuation (for example, normal fluctuation 8 s) may be selected. In addition, it is preferable to delay the digestion time of the operation-holding ball in consideration of the fact that the setting loss error is a forced loss and the player side suffers a disadvantage. That is, a configuration in which only the normal fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time (normal fluctuation 12 s) is selected is preferable. Also, a plurality of types of normal variation patterns (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal variation patterns for errors”) that are selected only at the time of a setting error and dedicated to the case of a setting error are provided. Good. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only one error normal variation pattern (for example, normal variation 5 s) is selected.

(About display effects such as decorative designs, and notices during design changes)
When a setting error is occurring, it is preferable to include setting error information for designating that a setting error is occurring when transmitting the variation pattern designation command. However, in the case of the configuration in which the normal variation pattern for error is selected, the variation pattern itself includes the setting abnormality error information, so that it is not necessary to include the setting abnormality error information.

  When the effect control unit 24 receives the change pattern designation command including the setting error error information, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the change pattern is selected during the setting error, and performs a decorative symbol change display game dedicated to the setting error. Such effect control is performed. Here, if a setting error has occurred, a “setting value error command” is transmitted from the main control unit 20 in step S734 during the setting error check process in FIG. In response to this, it is possible to grasp that a setting error has occurred.However, since this command is used exclusively for setting error notification, a decorative symbol variation display game exclusively used during setting error is executed. For this purpose, a variation pattern specifying command including setting error information is separately transmitted.

As the decorative symbol variation display game dedicated to the above-mentioned abnormal setting error, for example, an effect control system as shown in the following (c) to (d) can be employed. In any case, when the special symbol change display game (special figure change time) ends, the decorative symbol change display game also ends.
Direction (c): During a setting error, the notice effect itself is not displayed. For example, as an image display effect, only a background image display (a normal background image corresponding to the effect mode or a background image for error) irrelevant to the winning expectation and a variation display of the decorative pattern are performed.
Direction (ヰ): Floating display of decorative design is not performed. In this case, the special symbol variable display operation is being performed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped.
Effect (No): Performs a fluctuation display (variation display during RAM error) dedicated during a setting error. For example, a “swaying change (temporary stop state)” is performed in which the decorative design is swung up and down without starting the normal change display. In this case, the swing fluctuation may be performed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to a loss such as “2”, “4”, or “0”).
Direction (e): Normal fluctuation display is performed, but when stop display is performed, stop display is performed with a combination of specific symbols (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to loss such as “2”, “4”, “0”), or After performing the normal fluctuation display, the fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined combination of symbols for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stop display is performed.
Direction (h): Change from a normal decorative pattern to a decorative pattern dedicated to during setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol displaying a number from 1 to 9, but a decorative symbol dedicated to a setting error is, for example, a left, middle, or right symbol such as "D", "LA", or "-". Change to the special symbol that displays the character of. In this case, it is preferable that the decoration stop symbol has a special meaning. In the above-mentioned effects (C) to (C), when the decorative pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped, if the mode of “D”, “La”, “−” is displayed, the player or the surrounding clerk is displayed. It is possible to promptly notify that a RAM error has occurred.
Effect (Y): At least the sound effect is in the mute state or the lowest volume in the game setting. In this case, it is effective in giving a sense of incongruity to the player and promptly informing that the setting error has occurred. Further, the light amount related to the image display effect may be set as the minimum light amount in the game setting.
In addition, in the above-described effects (C) to (Y), an example was described in which at least the variation pattern designation command included the setting abnormal error information. However, even if the decorative design designation command also included the setting abnormal error information. Good.

<A. Special symbol change processing>
Next, the special symbol change processing (step S307) will be described.

  In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the variation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuating time T has not elapsed (the fluctuating time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is fluctuating. When the fluctuation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (fluctuation time T = 0), a “fluctuation stop command (BF01H)” indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the production control unit 24 as a production control command. . When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation stop command, it recognizes that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended after the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops (decision-displays) the decorative symbol being displayed in the fluctuation display. Thus, the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated when the special symbol variation display game is terminated.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a special symbol fixed signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and a fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switching to “under confirmation (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol is completed, the process exits the special symbol changing process. The above “special symbol determination signal output time” is a margin time for securing an output time of a special symbol determination signal for notifying that the special symbol has been fixedly displayed from the frame external terminal board 21 to the hall computer HC. It is. The “confirmed display time” is a time (stop display time) for which the stop display is held when the special symbol change display ends and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When the process goes through the above special symbol change process, the special symbol display data updating process (step S309) in FIG. 19 is performed, the process goes through the special symbol management process, and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S095 in FIG.

<22. Processing During Special Symbol Confirmation Time (Processing During Fluctuation Stop): FIGS.
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time (step S308) will be described. 22A and 22B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  22A and 22B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). Here, the “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer (see step S307 of the special symbol change processing). Until the above-mentioned special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer has become zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol change display status is switched to "standby (01H)" assuming that the current special symbol variation display game has ended (special symbol operation). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state number YJ (any value from 00H to 03H) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area (W_YJTPTN) (step S473).

  Next, a big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit determination flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, the condition device operation flag is set to ON (5 AH is stored) assuming that the big hit has been won. Set to state without state.

(When the big hit determination flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is OFF (= 00H) (step S474: $ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is obtained, and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . If the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: $ 5AH), that is, if it is "losing" that is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

  On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit flag as various setting processing (small hit game start processing) when the small hit symbol stops. After completing the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol, the process proceeds to a process of step S478.

  When the process proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol time-saving counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S479) as the amount of the current variation, and the special symbol time-saving counter after the subtraction is reduced. It is determined whether the value is zero (step S480).

  If the special symbol time saving counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of times of ending the special symbol time saving state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time saving number counter after the subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol time saving state has ended has been reached, and a setting process for the time saving end is performed (step S481). Here, as a setting process at the end of the time reduction, the power tue support function is set to the OFF state, and the transition to the power-less state, that is, the transition setting process from the time-saving state to the normal state is executed. Thus, in the next special symbol change display game, a special symbol change pattern based on the “normal state” is selected.

  After the setting process at the end of the time saving in step S481, Then A game state information transmission process is executed (step S482). here, The state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The status commands here include Contains information specifying the end of the time saving state. By this state command, the effect control unit 24 Knowing that the time saving state has ended in this game, Understand that the game will be shifted to the normal state from the next game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability change counter (the remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). If the special symbol probability change counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488. On the other hand, if the special symbol probability change counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability change counter is decremented by 1 as the current special symbol variation count (step S484), and the special symbol probability change after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number counter is zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability change counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything because the ST count has not ended.

  If the special symbol probability change counter after the subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is determined that the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached a prescribed ST frequency (65535 times in the present embodiment), and the setting process at the end of the probability change is performed. Execute (step S486). Here, as a setting process at the end of the probable change, a function relating to the probable change state is set to the OFF state as shown in the figure. Thus, in the next special symbol change display game, a special symbol change pattern based on the “normal state” is selected. Also in the case of the latent state, similarly to the processing of the variable state, the specified number of STs is monitored in steps S483 to S485, and the end timing of the latent state is managed in the setting processing at the time of the completion of the variable state.

  When the setting process at the end of the probable change in step S486 is completed, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S487). Here, as in step S482, a state command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The information included in the state command includes information designating the end of the high-probability state (probable state or latent state). included. With this state command, the effect control unit 24 knows that the high probability state (probable change state or latent state) has ended in the current game, and knows that the game will be shifted to the normal state from the next game.

  After the game state information transmission process of step S487 is completed, whether or not the special symbol change number counter is zero, that is, whether or not the specified number of game state transitions (the number of remaining CZs in the present embodiment) is zero is determined. Is determined (step S488). Here, the number of remaining CZs is monitored. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the “normal state” and “CZ” are “normal” in the gaming state and “the latent state” and “CZ” are in the gaming state “latent state”. CZ "'. That is, the latent state and the normal state have a common “CZ”. Therefore, during the “CZ” period, the same variation pattern distribution table (variation pattern distribution table for CZ) can be selected regardless of the internal game state, even though the internal game states are different. . Whether or not to select the CZ variation pattern distribution table is managed by a predetermined identifier (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)).

  If the special symbol change counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process exits the special symbol confirmation time period without doing anything. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S489) as the consumption of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S490).

  If the special symbol change frequency counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is determined that the CZ mode has not ended, and the process exits the special symbol confirmation time processing without doing anything.

  If the special symbol change counter after the subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the CPU 101 determines that the CZ mode has ended and executes a game state transition setting process (step S491). Here, a transition setting process of the game state after the remaining CZ number is completed is executed. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 has a CZ management unit that manages the CZ mode, and specifies the game state of the transition destination according to whether the big hit lottery probability state at the end of the CZ is low probability or high probability. Specifically, if it is the current CZ (normal), it shifts to the normal state, and if it is CZ (latent), it shifts to the latent state. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the “normal state” or the “latent state” is selected.

  Next, a game state information transmission process is executed (step S492). Here, as in step S482, the status command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, but the information included in the status command specifies "CZ (normal)" or "CZ (latent)" termination. Information is included. With this state command, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the CZ (“CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latent)”) has ended in the current game, and starts the “normal state” or “hidden” from the next game. To be sure.

  As described above, after exiting the special symbol change start process, the special symbol display data updating process (step S309) in FIG. 19 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. Proceed to (Step S095).

<23. Special electric accessory management process: FIG. 23>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric auditors product management process in step S095.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit flag (step S501). If the small hit flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), a small hit process is performed (step S504), and the process exits from the special electric accessory management process. In this small hitting process, a small hitting game control process for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device 52 (opening / closing control of the big winning port 50) relating to the small hitting game, a small hitting start command at the start of the small hitting game. , A command transmission process including transmission of a small-hit game end small-hit hit end command, a transition process related to the CZ mode, and the like.

  If the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S501: $ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: $ 5AH), in this case, the small electric game is not being performed (step S501: $ 5AH) and the big hit is not being played. Exit the management process.

  If the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric auditors product operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric auditors status branch processing). Note that the "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and is stored in the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area. Is stored in The special electric auditors operation status includes “start processing (00H)” for designating a standby state before the start of the big hit game, and “operation start processing (designation) for designating a standby state before the start of the round game ( 01H), “operating (02H)” to specify that a round game is being executed, and “continuation determination (03H)” to specify that it is under determination whether to continue the next round game. "Big hit end processing (04H)" which specifies that end processing at the end of the big hit game is included.

  In the special electric auditors product operation status branching process of step S503, the special electric auditors product operation status values are “starting process (00H)”, “operation start process (01H)”, “operation (02H)”, “continuation determination ( 03H), and the processes of steps S505 to S509 corresponding to each of the status values "big hit end processing (04H)" are executed. By these processes, a hit game corresponding to various hits is realized.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Jackpot start processing)
The big hit start process (step S505) will be described. At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value “starting process (00H)”. Therefore, when a big hit occurs, the big hit start processing is executed first.

  Here, first, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the local object continuous operation device operation flag of the RAM in the area as a setting process at the start of the big hit game required when the big hit game is started, whereby the special electric role The continuous operation (round game) is controlled to an allowable state. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation start processing (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the first counter is set to the continuous number counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game. The designated 01H is stored. Next, referring to the big hit start setting table (not shown), the "maximum number of rounds (specified round number)" corresponding to the current big hit is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). , “Round display LED number (display data for the number-of-rounds display device 39c)”, and “start interval time” in the special symbol auditors operation timer. The “start interval time” is an interval section from when the special symbol confirmation display time elapses and the big hit is confirmed (see step S471 in FIG. 22A) to when the special variable prize winning device 52 is activated. Refers to the time width that defines the section.

  Next, a "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process ends. The "big hit start command" includes, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. It is also used to determine a series of winning effects (opening effects, mid-round effects, end-of-round effects, ending effects, and the like corresponding to each big hit type) to be developed. Thus, the big hit game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory actuation start processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The pre-round start interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the big hit start processing (step S505) is monitored. If so, the "pre-open interval time (interval time until the next round game starts)" is monitored. Until the special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero, the current round game is not completed, so the process exits the special electric auditors operation start process without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the pre-opening interval time (in the case of the 1R, the start interval time) has elapsed, the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current round number are used. An opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 is set (a special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, a special winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in a special symbol accessory operation timer, and solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c (a large number of rounds executed according to the number of rounds). Winning opening / closing operation pattern data). In addition, the special winning opening opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in accordance with the opening operation of the special winning opening. This "winning opening command" includes round game start information and current round number information, and is used by the effect control unit 24 to display an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the process exits the special electric accessory management process. As a result, the special winning opening 50 is opened with the maximum winning opening / closing operation time as an upper limit, and the current round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the processing during the special electric auditors product operation (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, it is monitored whether or not the number of winning balls to the special winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol character operation timer is cleared. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric auditors product operation start process (step S506) is forcibly set to zero, and when the maximum winning number has been reached, the large winning opening 50 being opened is closed. Here, every time there is a winning in the special winning opening 50, a special winning opening winning command is transmitted. The special winning opening winning command includes a special winning opening and information on the number of prize balls (setting value information may also be included), and is used for a winning effect for notifying that the special winning opening 50 has been won. In addition, it is also used for appearance control such as a "prize for winning a winning change in winning prize", which is one mode of setting suggestive effects to be described later, and the above-mentioned payout ranking display (counting the total number of payouts). Until the special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero, that is, until the big winning opening opening time (maximum opening time) elapses or reaches the maximum winning number, do nothing. The process exits during special electric auditors operation.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, Assuming that this round game is over, The special electric accessory operation status is switched to “continuation determination (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), The remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol auditors operation timer. The above “remaining ball discharge time” After the winning opening has been closed, It refers to the extra time to discharge the remaining balls inside the big winning opening. In addition, with the closing of the grand prize opening (round game end), The interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, Exit from the special electric auditors operation process. This "inter-round interval command" Including round game end information and current round number information, In the effect control unit 24, It is used when an interval effect between rounds until the next round (inter-round interval effect) is displayed. Exit from the special electric auditors operation process.

(9-4. Special electric auditors product operation continuation determination processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharging time (1980 ms) after closing the special winning opening is set in the special symbol auditors operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharging time has elapsed. Is done. Until the above-mentioned special symbol auditors operation timer becomes zero, the process exits the special electric auditors operation continuation determination processing without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current round number has reached the specified round number (maximum round number). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, one is added to the continuous number counter (+1) as a process for continuing the round game, the "interval before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). On the other hand, if the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in a special symbol accessory operation timer as various setting processes at the end of the specified number of rounds, and the special electric accessory operation status is stored. Is switched to “End processing (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric auditors product operation status). In addition, the above "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the last round to the end of the big hit game after the elapse of the remaining ball discharge time and the time in which the ending production section is determined. Refers to the width.

  Then, a "big hit end command" for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process exits the special electric auditors product operation continuation determination process. The big hit end command includes information on the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information that can specify the game state after the big hit game is ended. Also used to determine the mode. Thereby, the round game of the specified round number is ended.

(9-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end processing (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the above-mentioned end interval time is set in the special symbol auditors operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol auditors operation timer reaches zero, the big hit end processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol auditors operation timer has reached zero (the end interval time has elapsed), a transition setting process for designating a gaming state after the big hit game is executed as various setting processes at the time of the big hit end. Here, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation processing (step S412 in FIG. 21) described above is set in a flag area and a counter corresponding to various functions for designating the game state. . Thereby, flags related to various functions for designating the gaming state are set to ON or OFF, and the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. For example, in the case of shifting to the probable change state after the big hit game, the general electric appliance opening extended state flag ON, the normal design time saving state flag ON, the normal design probable change state flag ON, the special design time reduction state flag ON, the special design probable change state The flag is turned on, and 65536 is set in the special symbol probability change counter.

  Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed. Here, various data (various flags and counters used in steps S505 to S509) used during the big hit game control processing are cleared, and the game state notification LED data (state notification data by the composite display device 38c) is updated. Then, the special electric auditors product operation status is switched to “starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric auditors product operation status).

  When the big hit end processing is finished, a series of control processing related to the big hit game ends, and the current big hit game ends.

<30. Processing on Effect Control Unit: FIGS. 30 to 31>
Next, the effect control processing on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control main process: FIG. 30) and a timer interrupt process activated by a periodic interrupt from the CTC (effect control timer interrupt process: 31).

<30. Effect Control Main Processing: FIG. 30>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the main process (produce control side main process) on the performance control unit side. The production control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts main processing on the production control side shown in FIG.

  In the main processing on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs necessary initialization processing before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, movable body starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as a process for normal operation, and otherwise, the effect soft random number updating process of step S01012 is repeatedly performed.

  In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not a main loop update cycle (counter value> 15), which is a trigger for executing the main loop process, has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during a later-described effect control-side timer interrupt process executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 31). In the present embodiment, the main loop processing is performed about every 16 ms. In the determination processing of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined. (S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop processing has arrived, the processing of steps S1003 to S1011 is executed, otherwise, various effects are performed until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO). The random number for lottery is updated (step S1012).

  When the main loop update cycle has come (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the presentation scenario for error notification during the error, the error release processing when the error is released, and the like are executed. Here, errors relating to the effect means (movable body character errors, voice IC errors, etc.) are monitored here.

  Next, a demonstration / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In the demonstration / power saving mode process, processes related to demonstration start waiting effect, customer waiting effect, and power saving mode are executed. Details of the demonstration / power saving mode processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a variable lottery mode management process is executed (step S1006). In the variable lottery mode management process, a lottery mode (variable lottery mode) for changing a lottery probability (appearance rate, setting suggestion degree) related to a setting suggestion effect to a high probability is managed. Details of the variable lottery mode management processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56, 57, 59, and 60.

  Next, effect switch input processing is executed (step S1007). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (the effect button 13 and the direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, an effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operation means is monitored in a button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 31 described later.

  Next, a command analysis process is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If the effect control command is stored, the command is read out, and the effect processing corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. I do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. The effect control command is acquired by the command reception interrupt processing, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

  For example, when at least a fluctuation pattern specification command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern specification command and the decorative design specification command are received, and they are stored in the reception buffer. In the case of command analysis, one or more types of effect patterns are determined based on information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The effect pattern determined here serves as “parts effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, a time schedule for the timing of the determined effect pattern (parts effect) and the effect time width is determined, and an effect scenario is configured. The effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. A variety of effect patterns (parts effects) incorporated in the effect scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing a "effect scenario" in a broad sense. The details of the command analysis processing relating to the commands closely related to the present invention will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32, 33, 37, 50, 55, and 58.

  After the command analysis processing is completed, a scenario update processing is subsequently executed (step S1009). In this scenario update process, the process of updating the content of the timer necessary for executing the rendering scenario and performing the rendering scenario based on the timer value is executed. A representative example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to an effect generation timing. For example, during a fluctuation period (decorative symbol fluctuation period) in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed (decorative symbol fluctuation period), which is substantially the same as the fluctuation period in which the special symbol is variably displayed (special symbol fluctuation period). On the axis, this timer manages a temporal schedule of what effect patterns are to be produced by what effect means and with what time width. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED drive data update process (step S1011) and an effect actor operation update process (step S1053) to be described later. Here, the effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the time of occurrence of one effect arrives, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243. . Note that the LED data for the optical display device is created in an LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created in a later-described production role operation update process (step S1053). You.

  Next, a sound output process is performed (step S1010). In this sound output processing, the sound data created in the scenario updating processing in step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, the sound data such as a phrase or volume is set based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and a sound effect is produced from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. Thereby, the sound effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, an LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In the LED drive data updating process, LED data for an optical display device such as the decorative lamp 13 and various effect LEDs is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and the Turn on and blink the LED. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  As described above, when the main loop processing ends, the effect soft random number update processing of step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Effect control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 31>
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a description will be given of the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt processing. This effect control-side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular intervals (1 ms), and is executed during execution of the effect control-side main process.

  In FIG. 31, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051), and then executes a button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state updating process, the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (the effect button 13, the direction key 75) is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in the RAM 243 in a predetermined manner. Store in area. This operation detection information is used when displaying information relating to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, a menu item, and the like in the scenario update process (step S1009) in FIG. In the present embodiment, it is possible to detect a single push, a long push, a continuous hit, and the like.

  Next, a production effect action updating process is executed (step S1053). In the production effect operation updating process, a process of creating motor control data for a movable object is performed based on the production scenario data and the production scenario timer.

  Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In the SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body role created in the above-described production role operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body part motor of the movable body to be operated and controls the operation. Thereby, a movable body effect is realized by the movable body role (clock-type role 80, flower shape role 90, rotating light 62, movable body 73) according to the rendering scenario.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission processing, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update processing (step S1009) of FIG. Execute display control. Thereby, the image effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Then An RTC information acquisition process is performed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, The date and time information (RTC information) measured by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information Used when presenting an effect according to RTC information, The variable lottery mode management process (step S1006) is used for shifting to the setting suggestive effect lottery mode.

  Next, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1055 is executed, the main loop update counter value is one of 0 to 15.

  When the processing in step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt processing is completed, and the main processing on the effect control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Setting change suggestion effect, setting suggestion effect>
(Positioning of invention 1: Objectives and problems)
The set value is determined by the pachinko hall based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall. On the other hand, for the player, the set value is an important factor for obtaining profit. Therefore, whether or not the above setting change has been made is a matter of great interest for the player to know by all means, since it is directly related to whether or not the jackpot is easily won.

On the one hand, as a measure to respond to the desire of the player, on the one hand, it is determined whether or not the set value of the gaming machine has been changed, and how many of the set values of the gaming machine have been set in the 1 to 6 levels. It is conceivable that the notification is made to the user. However, if the player is informed blindly of the setting change and the set value, the superiority between the gaming machines in the hall will be clearly understood, and the operating profit for the pachinko hall will be enormous. This has an effect, and the player loses the setting guess element, which impairs the fun of the game that is caused by the fact that the setting is not known or the setting value is unknown. On the other hand, whether or not the setting value of the gaming machine has been changed is completely hidden from the player, or the setting value of the gaming machine is confidentially determined as to how many of the 1 to 6 levels the value is. , The player may not be notified at all (not even suggesting or suggesting the same), which may further increase the player's anxiety that the player may be playing on a low-setting gaming machine, As a result, the game will be disappointed. Therefore, giving the setting inference element to the player improves the player's willingness to play the game, and also improves the operating rate of the gaming machine in the pachinko hall, which may lead to a profit on the hall side.

(Positioning of invention 2: Objectives and problems)
Further, as described above, what the set value is is one of the great interests of the player. Therefore, providing a setting suggestion using an effect and giving a setting guess element to the player is an important element for improving the player's willingness to play and making the effect versatile. Therefore, if no information on the set value is provided to the player without using the effect or the like, the player guesses the setting based on his / her own game result or the jackpot probability derived from the data counter DT or the like. However, it lacks interest and leads to a decrease in game motivation. Therefore, it is only necessary to present an effect related to the setting value (setting suggestion effect), but in the case of a ball game machine, it is sufficient to simply present the setting suggestion effect. No. The reason is as follows.

  In the case of a general slot machine, a player can arbitrarily operate a start lever operation (game start operation), a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation to end one game. Also, the next game can be started from the timing desired by the player. However, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, a game is started by winning a prize at the starting port, and the progress of the game cannot be arbitrarily determined by a player as in a slot machine. If there is an operation pending ball, the reservation is automatically consumed and the game is started, and the progress of the game of the next game is controlled by the gaming machine. Therefore, even if an effect that the player is worried about appears, the player often misses it without being able to confirm it slowly. For example, even if "Suggest settings on the jackpot end screen", the slot machine can check slowly without starting the next game, but in the case of a pachinko machine, if there is an operation pending ball, In many cases, the next game starts and disappears in a few seconds if it is short. Further, in the slot machine, a game result (reach eyes, a winning combination such as a bonus combination, etc.) derived from a mechanical torso is derived and the game is enjoyed, and an image display device or the like plays a strong role of supporting the game. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine, an image display device or the like is mainly used to notify a jackpot or notify a game result using an image display device or the like. In addition, although the information for notifying (suggesting) the jackpot and the expected degree of winning thereof and the information for suggesting the setting are significantly different in the purpose of notification, in the production, it is a notice production or a setting suggestion production. It is also assumed that people are confused and do not transmit correctly. For example, there is a case where the effect content suggests a setting but is mistaken for a jackpot notice (and vice versa).

  Therefore, in view of the above problems, effects related to the setting appear at an appropriate timing. ・ A variety of effects related to the setting are enriched. In consideration of such points, effects related to a variety of settings (setting suggesting effects indicating setting values, setting change suggesting effects indicating setting changes) are configured to be able to appear.

<Outline of setting change suggestion effect>
When the setting change operation is performed as described above, as described above, the “setting change command” (at the time of transition to the setting change mode) and the “setting completion command” are transmitted from the main control unit 20 side, and the effect control unit 24 (see FIGS. 6A, 10, and 29). When the effect control unit 24 receives the “setting change command” or the “setting completion command”, the effect control unit 24 recognizes that the setting has been changed (the setting change has been performed), and the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. After that, a configuration change suggestion effect (gack'n notice, background change notice, notice during payout ranking) is provided. It should be noted that the setting change information is included in the specification specification command (see FIGS. 33B and 36) instead of the “setting change command” or the “setting completion command”, and based on this, it is grasped that the setting change is present. You can also. Hereinafter, a case will be described as an example where the effect control unit 24 causes the “gack'n notice” to appear on the basis of the reception of the “setting completion command”.

  The "setting change suggestion effect" is an effect that, by visually recognizing that the appearance of the movable body has changed before and after the notice by the player, the setting change is definitely notified to the player. is there. Here, the term “setting change” in a narrow sense means changing the current setting value to another setting value (for example, changing from setting 3 to setting 4). In the case of, the term “setting change” is used including the setting of the same setting value after the change as before the change (for example, changing the setting value from setting 3 to setting 3), and is used in a broad sense. .

  The setting change suggestion effect is an effect that only informs the player that the setting has been changed, that is, that there has been a change to a different set value or a change (change) to the same set value. It does not tell how many “set values” are as a result of the change. That is, as in the setting suggestion effect, this is an effect mode in which the current setting value is not definitively reported or the setting value inference element is not given to the player, but the "setting change presence / absence" is merely reported. . In order for the player to grasp the set value, the player must wait for another element (setting suggestion effect) to appear.

  The setting change suggestion effect is activated when a “predetermined activation condition” is satisfied. One of the predetermined triggering conditions to consider is: (A) The timing (activation trigger) for generating a setting change suggestion effect has arrived, The other one is (B) It means that the player has won a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a "setting change suggestion effect lottery") as to whether or not a setting change suggestion effect is to be displayed. Whether a configuration change suggestion effect is activated when both conditions are met, Or It is free to adopt a configuration in which the setting change suggestion effect is activated only when the timing for generating the setting change suggestion effect has come. In this embodiment, That there was a “game behavior in the morning” And that the lottery about whether or not to show the setting change suggestion effect was won, Triggered by the fulfillment of both conditions, It is configured to produce a setting change suggestion effect. Once the activation condition is satisfied and the setting change suggestion effect can be displayed, Until when the activation condition is satisfied and the setting change suggestion effect can be displayed, In other words, even when a setting change suggestion effect occurs once, when is the period (end period) that can occur again, Can be arbitrarily determined.

(The first game behavior in the morning)
The “game behavior in the morning that is the first in the morning” that triggers the setting change suggestion effect is roughly classified into the following.
(A) The player starts launching a game ball, and a "first winning ball of the day" has occurred, or a "first symbol game (symbol change display game) of the day" has started (( I)). If the symbol change is started during the initialization operation (see step S038 in FIG. 6B) in the power-on state after the setting change, it does not correspond to “the first game behavior in the morning” (see 1 and 2), and no setting change suggestion effect (such as a Gack'n notice) is generated.
(B) The first (first) background effect change (stage change) occurs during the normal game period in which the player starts launching game balls and the symbol game is repeatedly performed one or more times. ((B) in FIG. 42).
(C) The operation of the player selects and determines the payout ranking display 102f (see FIG. 43) of the menu item on the menu screen 100, and the display is switched to the payout ranking display (FIG. 44) (FIG. 42). (D) (c)).
(D) During the waiting for a customer (during a customer waiting effect), the switching of the payout ranking display has occurred ((e) in FIG. 42). For example, switching of the payout ranking display during a demonstration movie.

  In the present embodiment, the payout ranking display until the first change in the first pattern in the morning (FIG. 42 (a)), the first notice of the background change in the morning (FIG. 42 (b)), and the first big hit in the morning (FIG. 42 (b)). FIG. 42 (c)) is considered to be the first game behavior in the morning, and this is used as a trigger for the setting change suggestion effect. If there is no operation pending ball (during demonstration start waiting or customer waiting presentation or in power saving mode), the player interrupts the game and displays the menu screen 100 shown in FIG. 43, Therefore, the determination is made by determining the payout ranking display item 102f (“the real sunrise ball ranking”) as the menu item. At time t2 in FIG. 42, the time corresponding to this is shown as a time waiting for a customer, but the ranking display is displayed at a predetermined timing as part of a demonstration movie or the like in a customer waiting production. This timing can also be a trigger. In this case, a part of the customer waiting effect functions as a setting change suggestion effect. In addition, when an image display effect such as a demo movie is displayed in the effect during the power saving mode, if the image display effect includes a ranking display, part of the image display effect functions as a setting change suggestion effect. I do.

(Asaichi Gakkun Notice)
The setting change suggestion effects dealt with in the present embodiment are three types of “gack'n notice”, “background change notice”, and “announcement during payout ranking”. Of these, the Gackn notice and the background change notice are triggered by the fact that the gaming machine had the “first game behavior in the morning” , “Asaichi Gakkun Notice”, “Asaichi Background Change Notice”, and “Asaichi Outcome Ranking Medium Notice”. Although the term "preliminary notice" is used for the sake of explanation, the wording (preliminary notice) is attached to the notice. This is an effect mode in which the presence / absence of a setting change is indicated (notified) by a predetermined effect mode instead of the effect mode.

  "Gack'n notice" is to move the movable body in a predetermined movement pattern such as jogging, that is, to displace (move) all or a part of the movable body and give the player the appearance of the movable body before and after the notice. It is a production that lets you know that there has been a change. In the case of the present embodiment, the movable body 73 of the exhilarating button 70 incorporated in the effect button 13 is caused to perform a rotational displacement of reciprocating once or a plurality of times within a predetermined rotation angle range, and with this inching operation, It is said that Gackn's notice was given. This movement of the movable body 73 is an operation mode that does not occur in the normal game state as an action of the refreshing button, and thus the player can understand that the setting change suggestion effect has been made. However, the same operation as a part of the operation of the exhilaration button in the normal game state can be adopted as the jogging operation of the Gackn notice. As described above, the “gakkun notice” is, in a nutshell, an effect in which the button device moves rattling for a moment.

  In FIG. 42, (a) shows the case of “Asaichi Gacken Notice”. The “first game behavior in the morning”, which is the trigger of the “first morning notice”, is that the first symbol game (first time in the morning) has started. This behavior can be grasped by the effect control unit 24 first receiving the “command relating to design variation”, that is, receiving any one of the hold addition command, the variation pattern designation command, and the decorative design designation command. can do. In (a) Asahi Gakkun notice of FIG. 42, a gaming ball is launched for a gaming machine in a waiting state for a customer, and an ascension notice is generated when the first prize of a game ball is generated at time t3. Can. In the following, when it is referred to as "waiting for a customer", unless otherwise specified, it is performed in at least one period (all periods or a part of the period) during the demonstration start waiting stage, during the customer waiting stage, and during the power saving mode. It means there is.

  However, if the setting has not been changed when the power is turned on, the setting change suggestion effect lottery (the lottery for executing the morning one-gakkun notice in S2331 in FIG. 35) is not performed, and if the setting has been changed, the setting change suggestion effect lottery is performed. The rate at which the morning notice appears (the rate of the confirmed operation) is, for example, about 50% by the lottery. The lottery probability is the same for each set value. In addition, about the point that the lottery probability is the same for each set value, the same applies to the morning background change notice and the notice during the display of the payout ranking. The reason why the lottery probabilities are the same is that the setting change suggestion effect exclusively informs (suggests or implies) the presence or absence of the setting change.

  This one-gackn notice in the morning does not appear except for the first rotation, so it is an effect with a short appearance period. In other words, it is a privileged effect that is given only to the player who played the game first in the morning. In addition, the “gack'n notice” is generated during the demonstration start waiting effect, during the customer waiting effect, and during any of the effects in the power saving mode, when the trigger (first rotation) arrives. When the “Gackn's notice” effect occurs, if the player participation type effect is combined, control is performed so that the effect button 13 can be pressed. At this time, an operation instruction effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 13 (press operation lamp operation) is also performed.

(Gackn's notice with the refreshing button 70)
The exhilarating button 70 is provided with a movable body 73 rotatable forward in the inside thereof, to be more precise, in a push button type cylinder 72. (A) In a situation where a “normal game” is being performed, when the push button-type cylinder 72 is pressed, or when a predetermined timing before or after the push button type cylinder 72 is reached, the movable body 73 is set to a predetermined normal state. Perform a rolling operation (rotating and oscillating motion). The operation pattern and the operation amount of the rolling operation in the normal state differ depending on the effect contents to be expressed. For example, the “jitter” (rotation in the normal state) that returns to the initial position after rotating by a predetermined angle θ in one direction. ), The normal operation (default operation, see S2335 in FIG. 35) is, for example, the momentum (angle θ1) is 2 mm (small motion). Is larger than that of, for example, 5 mm (large motion), and repeats rattling once or a plurality of times. The reason why the momentum of the gakkun notice action is made larger as θ2> θ1 is to avoid being misunderstood as a jogging action related to the notice effect during a normal game, and to make it easier to recognize that it is a setting change suggestion effect. For this reason, the same amount of exercise may be set.

(Modification of Gakkun Notice Implementation)
In the present embodiment, a “movable body” is used as an effect means for embodying (expressing) the effect of the Gackn notice. Specifically, of the functions of the effect button 13 (the normal button 13A, the rotary light button 66, and the exhilaration button 70), the exhilaration button 70 in which the movable body 73 is configured to be rotatable forward is used. However, the normal button 13A of the effect button 13 and the rotating light button 66 can also be used as a means for realizing a Gackn notice. In addition to the effect button 13, other movable bodies such as a clock-type accessory 80 and a flower-type accessory 90 can also be used as a means for expressing a Gack'n notice. Further, since the cross-shaped direction key 75 also has an operation part which can be moved up and down, it can be treated as a movable body and used as a means for expressing Gack'n notice.

Means for expressing Gackn's notice (production means) may be any stimulus transmission means that can exert a production effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, touch, etc. I can't. For example,
(A) A pressurizing device or a wind pressure device installed inside the operation handle and transmitting a contact pressure or a wind pressure to a palm of an operator holding the operation handle when activated is used.
(B) A sound generation device (sound production means) such as a speaker 46 is used. For example, it outputs a sound exclusively for gakkun notice (for example, an impact sound).
(C) Light generating means (light producing means) such as the decorative lamp 45 is used. For example, the light is emitted by light dedicated to Gackn notice (for example, flash effect).
(D) An effect display device (display means) such as the liquid crystal display device 36 is used. For example, an image display dedicated to Gackn notice (for example, a blackout effect) is displayed.
One or more of the effect means (A) to (D) can be used exclusively or incidentally. In the point that the display means can be used, the morning change background notice described below is also a kind of the Gakkun notice.

(Asaichi Background Change Notice)
In FIG. 42, (b) shows a case of “Asaichi Background Change Notice”. The “behavior in the first game in the morning” that is the trigger of the “morning one background change notice” is that the player starts launching a game ball and the first (or repeated) symbol game is performed on the liquid crystal display in the process of This is the first (background effect) switching of the stage effect (stage change). In the (b) morning background change notice of FIG. 42, the first background change occurs at the switching of the symbol game at the time t4 during the game, and the morning background change notice is generated using this as a trigger. In short, this “Asaichi Background Change Notice” is the first background change after the power is turned on, and the setting is changed by shifting to the special mode background (setting change notification background) as a setting change suggestive effect. Notify that you are.

  This “morning one background change notice” does not always appear in the first rotation, and appears, for example, at about 33% of the background change, and does not change until the background change is performed again. Therefore, the effect is “moderate appearance period”. However, once the morning change background notice has appeared, the trigger for activating the morning change background notification does not come again.

  The morning background change notice is a setting change suggestion effect lottery that is drawn in a normal game (for example, the first rotation game) only when the power is turned on in a state where the setting is changed (the morning background change notice in S2353 in FIG. 36). Appears when a winner is won by lottery). The morning change background notice is not a short-time production that appears only in the first rotation like the morning change notice, but once it wins the background change lottery, it does not change until the background change is made again , Which is a medium-term production. Therefore, as in the morning notice, the significance of the privilege, such as being given to the player who played the game first in the morning, diminishes, but as long as it appears, it will be possible to see if there is a setting change in a longer game period. There is an advantage in that it can be done. For example, the morning one Gakkun notice can be watched exclusively by the player who played first in the morning, but the morning one background change notice is a game played by the player who has won the morning one background change notice lottery (S2353). May continue to appear after quitting the game, so that there is a possibility that other players can appreciate the game.

  In the case of winning the setting change suggestion effect lottery (morning one background change announcement lottery) related to the morning one background change announcement, the transition rate to the special mode background (the special background shown in the figure) can be increased. The special mode background is a background effect in which a background image that does not appear in a normal game is displayed. That is, the background image does not appear unless the setting is changed. The transition to the special mode background is either non-transition or transition, and the transition rate is the same for each set value (for example, 33%). It should be noted that, although it may appear in a normal game, it may be a special mode background in which a background image that appears very rarely is displayed. For example, in a normal game or when there is no setting change, the transition is made at 1/1000, but in the morning one background change notice lottery, the transition may be made at 1/3 of the high probability. Further, as a variation for each setting (set values 1 to 6), a difference can be provided in the transition rate. For example, it can be determined that the higher the set value, the higher the transition rate to the special mode background.

  In this example, as a background change notice in the morning, the display is shifted to the special mode background by the image display effect. Alternatively, sound, light, or the like may be additionally generated to provide a setting change suggestion effect.

(Preliminary notice during the ranking)
In FIG. 42, (c) shows the case of "announcement during payout ranking". The “behavior in the first game in the morning”, which is the trigger of the “announcement during ball ranking”, is a process in which a player starts launching a game ball and repeatedly performs a symbol game one or more times. The game is interrupted before the first (first time) big hit occurs, and a switch to the payout ranking display occurs on the liquid crystal screen.

  42C, the game is interrupted at the time t5 between the first symbol game and the occurrence of the first big hit (time t3 to t7), and the direction key 75 or the effect button 13 Is operated, the payout ranking 102f is selected and determined as a menu item from the menu screen 100 (FIG. 43), and the displayed payout ranking display screen 771 (FIG. 44) displays a "specific setting change suggestion image (for example, character 775, 776)], the setting change is suggested.

  This “specific setting change suggestion image (specific display mode)” is, for example, the image arrangement of the characters 775 and 776 of the payout ranking on the liquid crystal screen is opposite to the normal arrangement (default) shown in FIG. A specific display mode in which the arrangement (FIG. 44B) or the character, the whole background image, or a part of the background (display of an object such as a specific item or character) is different from the default normal display mode Indicates (indicates) that the setting is changed.

  42 (d) and (e) of FIG. 42 are examples showing that this "announcement during payout ranking" may occur in another section. In this case (d), the “behavior in the first game in the morning” is the first time (first time) in the process in which the player starts launching the game ball and repeats the symbol game one or more times. Until the big hit occurs, the player interrupts the game, interrupts the game, and switches to the payout ranking display on the liquid crystal screen. In the case (e), “the behavior in the first game in the morning” is that the switching of the payout ranking display on the liquid crystal screen has occurred during the demonstration waiting for the customer. This “announcement during the ball-ranking ranking” appears when the winning is achieved (about 5%) in the setting change suggestion effect lottery (lottery execution during the ball-ranking ranking in S2102 in FIG. 37), that is, rarely appears. However, as long as the lottery is won once, the setting change suggestion image of the notice during the payout ranking (FIG. 44 (b)) does not change until the first big hit, so that "the effect with a long appearance period" Becomes In this regard, the announcement during the payout ranking has an effect in which the average possible production appearance period is longer than that of the above-mentioned morning one-gakkun notice and the morning-one background change notice. Therefore, more players have a chance to appreciate the notice during the payout ranking than the morning change notice.

  For the announcement during the ranking of the payout ranking, the period during which the trigger is valid (trigger valid period) is set until the first (first) big hit occurs (until the big hit game starts), that is, after the power is turned on. After the occurrence of the first (first) big hit, the trigger of the notice during the payout ranking does not come. Although the details will be described later, the above-mentioned payout ranking display uses the same character background image as the background image (image due to the change of the end interval screen) determined by the ending effect at the previous big hit (the effect during the big hit end INT). This is updated and displayed (see the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514) in FIG. 58 described later). From this point, the period up to the occurrence of the first jackpot is regarded as a substantial activation trigger validity period.

(Modification A1)
In the present embodiment, the payout ranking display until the first change in the first pattern in the morning (FIG. 42 (a)), the first notice of the background change in the morning (FIG. 42 (b)), and the first big hit in the morning (FIG. 42 (b)). 42 (D), (C), and (E)) are considered to be the first game behaviors in the morning, and this is used as a trigger for the setting change suggestion effect. However, for the morning background change notice and the payout ranking display, the trigger validity period may be determined as follows. Displayed in the first demonstration movie until a specific event occurs, for example, until a specific notice effect (high-expected notice such as strong SP reach or multiple pseudo-reams (four times pseudo)) occurs The period until the game is performed may be considered to be the first game behavior in the morning, and may be set as the activation possible period. Further, the “specific game period” can be set as the activation trigger valid period. For example, until the number of game executions reaches a predetermined number (for example, up to 50 rotations), or until the number of occurrences of reach (or a specific reach) reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the number of reach is 10). Until the number of OUT balls reaches the predetermined number of OUT balls (for example, until the number reaches 1,000), it may be considered as the first game behavior in the morning, and may be set as the activation trigger validity period.

(Modification A2)
The setting change suggestion effects dealt with in the present embodiment are provided with three types, “Asaichi Gakkun Notice”, “Asaichi Background Change Notice”, and “Announcement of Rollout Ranking”, which have different triggers. However, among these setting change suggestion effects, at least one of the setting change suggestion effects may be provided. In addition, when a plurality of types of setting change suggestion effects are provided, a configuration may be such that not all setting change suggestion effects can appear but a part of the setting change suggestion effects. For example, when one setting change suggestion effect (for example, morning one Gakkun notice) appears, the other setting change suggestion effect (for example, morning one background change notice and notice during ball ranking) does not appear. Can be. In addition, if a specified number of setting change suggestion effects are presented (for example, two types of morning notice and morning background change notice), other (remaining) setting change suggestion effects (for example, advance notice during payout ranking) Can be configured not to appear. Further, which setting change suggestion effect is to be presented may be determined by a predetermined selection lottery. Further, when a plurality of setting change suggestion effects are executed simultaneously (duplicately), the effects may be executed based on the priority of which effect is executed first. For example, in the case where the first morning notice and the first background change notice appear at the same time in the first revolution, the first morning notice is preferentially executed. In addition, a configuration may be employed in which two or more types of setting change suggestion effects can appear simultaneously (overlappingly). The number of types of setting change suggestion effects is not particularly limited and can be freely determined.

<Control Example 1: Morning Gackn Notice in FIG. 42>
(Setting completion command reception processing: FIG. 32)
Referring to FIG. 32, when a “setting completion command” is transmitted from main control unit 20, effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) recognizes that a setting change has been made, and sets change information (change information). Is stored in the RAM 243, the setting change completion effect data is set (step S2001), and a setting process of turning on the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag corresponding to the setting change suggestion effect is performed (step S2002). Here, as the setting change suggestion effect, three types of “Asaichi Gacken notice”, “Asaichi background change notice”, and “announcement during ball ranking” are handled. The setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag specifies that the execution of the setting change suggestion effect is in an allowable state. Therefore, when the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag is ON, the setting change suggestion effect is placed in the execution allowable state, and when the trigger has come, the setting change suggestion effect is executed. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the setting change suggestion effect is executed through the setting change suggestion effect lottery (S2331 in FIG. 35, S2353 in FIG. 36, and S2102 in FIG. 37).

  In the process of step S2002, as the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag corresponding to each notice, the morning notice flag is turned on (= 5AH), the morning change notice flag is turned on, and the ranking ranking notice flag is turned on. Set. If the setting has not been changed, none of the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flags is turned ON, and "non-execution" of the setting change suggestion effect is designated.

  In the present embodiment, the flag is immediately turned on without going through a lottery to determine whether to turn on the setting change suggestion effect execution permission flag, and that effect is stored in the RAM 243 of the effect control unit in advance. At this stage, the game ball is in the “Asaichi” situation in which the game ball has not been fired even once since the power was turned on. In such a situation in the morning, the effect control unit 24 knows that the setting has been changed.

(Decoration designating command reception processing: FIG. 33)
Referring to FIG. 33, in the decorative symbol designating command receiving process, a variation pattern designating command reception confirmation process (S2301) for confirming that the variation pattern designating command has been received and that the information has been acquired, After sequentially performing a decorative symbol designating command analysis process (S2302) for acquiring information, a preview effect lottery process (S2303) and a decorative stop symbol lottery process (S2304) for determining an effect based on the information. Are sequentially performed. This announcement effect lottery process (S2303) is for performing a lottery of all announcement effects related to the current symbol game, and the decoration stop symbol lottery process (S2304) is a symbol (reach configuration symbol) for configuring a reach symbol. ) Or a combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped, and is a part of the preliminary effect lottery processing (S2303). The decoration stop symbol lottery process also includes a process of determining a reach symbol according to a setting suggestion effect 03 (normal reach symbol suggestion) described later.

  Next, a continuous announcement effect management process (S2305), that is, a change start-time advance look-ahead announcement execution management process is performed, and the customer waiting operation status is set to "00H" (in game) (S2306). After performing various setting processes (S2307), the process exits the decorative symbol designating command receiving process. The customer waiting operation status is a status value indicating a behavior of a symbol game (in this case, a decorative symbol variation display game), and in short, is a status value for identifying whether or not a game is being played. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. The customer waiting operation status is “00H”, which designates a game such as running a game, “01H”, which designates a demonstration start waiting effect (demonstration waiting waiting) before the customer waiting effect starts, and a customer waiting effect ( "02H" for designating the power saving mode and "02H" for designating the power saving mode.

(Preliminary production lottery process: Fig. 34)
FIG. 34 shows the details of the announcement effect lottery process (S2303). Referring to FIG. 34, in this announcement effect lottery process, the morning one-gakkun announcement lottery process (S2311), the background change announcement lottery process (S2312), and the fluctuating effect scenario type lottery process for determining the basic effect scenario serving as a base. (S2313), various announcement lottery processes (S2314) for determining a specific rendering scenario based on the basic rendering scenario, and rendering scenario data setting process (S2315) for setting rendering scenario data used in the current game. Is composed of As a result, various effects (effects during change (including setting suggestion effects)) appearing during the current symbol game (decorative symbol change display game) are determined. In addition, the setting suggestion effect during the symbol game is determined in the above-described various notice lottery processes (S2314).

(Asaichi Gakkun Notice Lottery Processing: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows details of the morning one-gakkun notice lottery process (S2311). In this morning one Gakkun announcement lottery process, it is first determined whether or not the morning one Gakkun announcement flag = 5 AH (ON state) (S2330). If this determination is NO (S2330: NO), the morning one Gakkun announcement If nothing is done, return without doing anything. On the other hand, if the determination is YES (S2330: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2331 to perform a morning lottery notice execution lottery (S2331), and determines the result (S2332). If this lottery result is a winning (YES), “Asaichi Gakkun announcement effect scenario data” is set (S2333), and if a non-winning (NO), a normal (default) operation “Asaichi default operation effect scenario data” is set. (S2335). Then, the flag for morning notice is returned to “00H (OFF state (non-execution))” (S2334).

  In other words, for the morning Gackn notice, after the power is turned on, the morning Gackn notice execution lottery is performed at the time of receiving the decorative pattern designation command for the first rotation, but regardless of the winning or non-winning result, the morning Gackn notice Clear the flag. As a result, the morning notice is not executed until the next setting change.

  In the case of this embodiment, the winning probability in the morning one-gakkun notice lottery is 50%. However, a configuration in which the morning one Gakkun notice appears only when there is “the first game behavior in the morning” in the gaming machine or by setting the winning probability in the morning one Gakkun notice lottery to 100% You can also Further, in this embodiment, the default operation is performed in step S2335 in the case of non-winning in the morning one-gakkun notice execution lottery, but the default operation need not be performed in the case of non-winning.

(Background change notice lottery process: Fig. 36)
FIG. 36 shows details of the background change announcement lottery process (S2312). In this background change announcement lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the morning background change announcement flag = 5AH (ON state) (S2351).

  If this determination is YES, the flow advances to step S2352 to acquire a morning background change lottery table (not shown) and perform a morning background change announcement lottery (S2352 to S2353). In this morning change background lottery table, at least the lottery probability (transition rate) to the special mode background is determined, and by the lottery, the transition to the special mode background (setting change suggestion background effect), that is, the morning change background notice Is determined. The winning probability is, for example, about 30%. In this morning one background change announcement lottery (S2353), based on the morning one background change lottery table, when the background effect of the transition destination is randomly selected and the transition to the special mode background is won (S2354 = YES), the morning one background change announcement The use flag is returned to 00H (S2355), and background effect scenario data is set (S2356). If it is determined in step S2354 that the special mode background (setting change suggestion background effect) has not been won (S2354 = NO), the process proceeds to step S2356 without returning the morning change background notice flag to “00H”, Set background effect scenario data according to the lottery result. In other words, the morning first background change announcement lottery is not necessarily won in the first rotation. After the winning, the process ends when the next time, the normal background change announcement lottery is won (see the processing route of NO in step S2356 and step S2351). In short, the background change notice is an effect mode in which at least a part of the effect mode (for example, all or a part of the background display) is sequentially changed every time a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2351 that the flag for morning background change notice is not 5AH (morning background change announcement effect) (S2351: NO), the process proceeds to step S2357, the normal background change lottery table is acquired, and the normal background change lottery table is acquired. A preliminary lottery is performed (S2357 to S2358). In the normal background change lottery table, lottery data for determining which one of the plurality of background effects other than the special background mode should be shifted to the background effect is determined.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S2356 to set background effect scenario data according to the lottery result. However, if the current fluctuation pattern is at least a reach fluctuation pattern (may include a pseudo continuous fluctuation pattern), the lottery result of the morning one background change announcement lottery (S2352) is not executed. Here, in the case of the reach variation pattern, the lottery result of the normal background change announcement lottery (S2358) is prioritized. In other words, in the case of a pattern other than the reach fluctuation pattern, that is, in the case of the normal fluctuation pattern, a morning background change notice lottery (S2352) is executed, and the "setting change" is notified only after winning this lottery. This is because, without any execution conditions, regardless of the fluctuation pattern such as normal fluctuation, reach fluctuation, pseudo-running fluctuation pattern, etc., if you make a background change lottery in the morning and shift to the special background mode, Is confused with the announcement production, saying, "Is the degree of winning expectation high ?!" Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the reach variation pattern, the morning one background change announcement lottery is not executed, and in the case of the normal variation pattern, the morning one background change announcement lottery is executed. In addition, it is preferable not to execute the morning one background change announcement lottery even in the case of the normal fluctuation pattern with the pseudo run. This is because the pseudo-run is also a kind of announcement effect, and if the transition to the special background mode occurs in the case of the occurrence of the pseudo-run, as described above, the player's expectation of winning is excessively inspired. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the configuration for determining whether or not to execute the morning-first background change announcement lottery (S2352) in accordance with the content of the variation pattern, that is, a specific variation pattern case, the execution condition and the Only in the fluctuation pattern of, the background change notice in the morning can appear.

(Modified example of Asaichi Background Change Notice)
In addition, when the following predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the configuration may be such that a morning background change announcement lottery is executed. For example, it can be configured as in the following (h) to (v). (H) The execution of the morning one background change announcement lottery is performed only in the first rotation after the power is turned on. (I) A morning background change notice lottery is executed at a specific rotation speed. For example, the morning background change notice lottery is executed only in the tenth rotation after the power is turned on (the number of lotteries is one), or the tenth and fifteenth rotations are executed after the power is turned on (multiple lottery chances are given). There is a limit to the number of lotteries.) (N) The morning one-background change notice lottery is not executed until the predetermined number of symbol games (the number of fluctuations) is reached (when the predetermined number of revolutions is reached, the execution of the lottery is allowed). (L) The morning background change notice lottery is not executed until the normal background change notice lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. For example, the morning background change announcement lottery is not executed until the normal background change announcement lottery is executed at least once. (Ii) Do not execute the morning background change announcement lottery until a predetermined number of normal background changes have appeared. For example, the morning background change announcement lottery is not executed until at least one normal background change announcement is made. In the case of (i) to (ヲ) above, in the predetermined game period (the number of symbol games, the number of lotteries and / or the number of wins in the normal background change announcement lottery are the execution conditions), no morning background change announcement appears at all. It can be in the form. In this mode, since there is a section in which a morning background change notice is prohibited from appearing, it is necessary to execute one or more symbol games in order to see the notice. The degree increases, and the effect can be varied.

(Customer waiting command reception processing: FIG. 37)
Next, the customer waiting command reception processing will be described with reference to FIG. During the period up to the first big hit in the morning, if the game is over and there is no operation pending ball, or if the gaming machine is left for a predetermined time, waiting for customers (during demonstration start waiting, customer waiting production, or power saving) Mode). By operating the effect button 13 and the directional key 75 while the customer is waiting, menu display and menu operation are performed. By selecting "Hoshi Sunrise Ball Ranking (102f in FIG. 43)" as a desired item from the menu items and pressing the effect button 13, the item is determined and a ranking image (ranking effect) is displayed (for example, 42, t5).

  FIG. 37 shows details of the customer waiting command reception processing. In the customer waiting command receiving process, first, it is determined whether or not the flag for announcement of payout ranking is 5AH (S2101). If the determination in S2101 is NO, the process proceeds to step S2106, where 180 s is set in the demonstration start timer, and a demonstration start waiting effect is started (S2106 to S2107). Then, the customer waiting operation status is set to 01H (during demonstration start waiting), and the process exits from the customer waiting command reception processing (S2108).

  If the determination in S2101 is YES, the process proceeds to S2102, in which a lottery execution during lottery ranking is performed (S2102), and the result is determined (S2103). If the lottery result of the preliminary lottery execution lottery during the pitching is a win (S2103: YES), “Asaichi special pitch ranking display setting processing” is performed and “Asaichi special background effect (specific image in FIG. 44 (b))”. The effect data is set (S2104), and the announcement flag during payout ranking is returned to 00H (S2105). On the other hand, if the lottery result of the preliminary lottery execution lottery during the payout ranking is non-winning (S2103 = NO), the “morning one normal payout ranking display setting processing” is performed and the “morning one normal background effect (the default image of FIG. 44 (a)) is performed. ) ”Is set (S2109). Thereafter (but until the jackpot game starts), when the ranking display appears, the morning special background effect (the specific image in FIG. 44 (b)) or the morning normal background effect (the default image in FIG. 44 (a)) Is displayed.

  After that, the process advances from step S2109 to S2106 to set 180 s in the demonstration start timer and start a demonstration start waiting effect (S2106 to S2107). Here, the demonstration start waiting effect is a standby screen (a screen in which the screen at the end of the fluctuation is continuously displayed and maintained) before shifting to the demo movie (demo screen). Then, the customer waiting operation status is set to 01H (during demonstration start waiting), and the process exits from the customer waiting command reception processing (S2108).

  The "Asaichi normal background effect" set in the Asaichi normal pitch ranking display setting process (S2109) is, for example, when the character arrangement of the pitch ranking on the liquid crystal screen is "Fujika: Fujimaru-kun" (Fujika on the left side of the screen, right side of the screen) Fujimaru-kun). On the other hand, the “Asaichi special background effect” set in the Asaichi special pitch ranking display setting process (S2104) is based on “Fujimaru-kun,” in which the character arrangement of the pitch ranking on the liquid crystal screen is “reverse relationship” to the above. : Fujika-chan ”(Fujimaru-kun on the left side of the screen and Fujika-chan on the right side).

  The character arrangement of the payout ranking is in a reverse relationship to the normal, that is, a specific display mode (setting change suggestion display) different from the normal display mode (default display) appears. Can know that the setting has been changed. In the case of this embodiment, when the lottery announcement during lottery ranking execution lottery (S2102) is not won, when the customer waiting command is received again without clearing (00H) the flag for the lottery ranking. In addition, it is possible to execute a notice execution lottery during the payout ranking, and a plurality of lottery chances are given. As a result, many players can be given a chance to make an announcement during the payout ranking. However, the following adverse effects are also assumed.

  If a lottery chance is given in the dark, the advanced player who knows this will return the operation pending ball to the state of no action after playing the game once (for example, the game will be interrupted every time one operation pending ball is generated) Then, the game action of avoiding winning in the starting opening) and receiving a lottery execution notice during the payout ranking by receiving the waiting command for customers is repeatedly performed, and the appearance of the notice during the payout ranking is repeated. Then, as a result of repeating the act many times, if there is no notice during the payout ranking, it is possible to guess that "no setting change" can be made, and this leads to inequality between players, which leads to inequality between players. In addition, such a time-consuming action may cause a reduction in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, for example, only when a customer waiting command sent when the power is turned on is received, or until the number of receptions of the customer waiting command reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times), a lottery is performed during the payout ranking. The lottery result is cleared (if the lottery is allowed up to a predetermined number of times (three times), the lottery result of the predetermined number of times) is cleared regardless of whether the lottery has been won or not, by clearing the advance flag during the payout ranking. Is also good. In this case, the configuration may be such that the clearing process of step S2105 is performed after the process of step S2109. In this way, the execution of the advance notice during the payout ranking is determined by lottery only when the power is turned on, and the above-mentioned problem is solved. Appears, and there is an advantage that many players can have a chance to touch the notice during the ranking of the payouts.

(Demo / power saving mode processing: FIG. 38)
FIG. 38 shows details of the demo / power saving mode processing. In the demonstration / power saving mode processing, first, the customer waiting operation status is checked (S3001). In step S3001, it is determined whether or not the game is being played (00H). If the game is in progress (00H), the process directly exits the demo / power saving mode process without doing anything.

  If the game is not in progress (00H), a menu management process (S3002) shown in FIG. 39 is performed in detail. Then, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting operation status is in the power saving mode (03H) (S3003). If it is in the power saving mode (03H), the process exits the demonstration / power saving mode process.

  If it is not during the power saving mode (03H), it is checked whether the demo start timer is 0, that is, whether it is time to shift to the demo mode (during customer waiting production) (S3004). If the demonstration start timer is not zero, it is not necessary to shift to the demonstration mode yet, and the process directly exits the demonstration / power saving mode processing. On the other hand, if the demo start timer is zero, it is time to shift to the demo mode, and it is checked whether the customer waiting operation status is already in the demo mode (02H) (S3005).

  If it is not in the demonstration mode (02H) in the determination in step S3005, the demonstration waiting (demonstration waiting effect) has been completed, and the process proceeds to step S3006 to perform demo mode transition setting processing. In this demo mode transition setting processing, the power saving mode start timer is set to 120 seconds, a customer waiting effect (such as a demo movie) is started, the customer waiting operation status is set to 02H (during demo mode), and the demo / power saving mode is set. Exit processing.

  If the game is not in the game or in the power saving mode, that is, in the demonstration mode (02H), the process proceeds to S3007, and it is determined whether it is time to start the power saving mode start timer. If the power saving mode start timer is not yet zero (S3007: NO), the process exits the demonstration / power saving mode process. On the other hand, if the power saving mode start timer is zero (S3007: YES), it is determined that the timing to shift to the power saving mode has come, and power saving mode shift setting processing is performed (S3008). In this power saving mode transition setting processing, the power saving mode is started, the customer waiting operation status is set to 03H (during the power saving mode), and the process exits the demonstration / power saving mode processing.

(Menu management processing: FIG. 39)
FIG. 39 shows details of the menu management process (S3002, FIG. 38). In the present embodiment, when a game is not being played, that is, when there is no operation-holding ball, the menu management process is immediately started, and menu items can be selected, for example, the volume and the like can be adjusted. For selecting a menu item, the direction key 75 functions as a selection key, and the effect button 13 (structure of a push button) functions as an enter button.

  In the menu management processing of FIG. 39, it is determined whether the menu is being displayed (S3101). If the menu is not being displayed (S3101: NO), that is, if the menu has not been displayed yet, the process waits until the effect button 13 is pressed (S3102: YES), and performs a menu display start process (S3103). As a result, when the effect button (decision button) is pressed while the menu is not displayed, the menu screen is displayed. Next, the demo start timer is set to 180 seconds (S3104), the no-operation timer is set to 20 seconds (S3105), and the process exits the menu management process. The no-operation timer is a timer for returning to the demonstration screen (during a customer waiting effect) when no button operation is performed for a predetermined time.

  If the menu is being displayed by the above processing (S3101: YES) or if the effect button has not been pressed (S3102: NO), the process proceeds to step S3106, and “operation management during menu display” shown in detail in FIG. Process ”. This is processing when a button is pressed in the menu screen.

(Operation management processing during menu display: FIG. 40)
FIG. 40 shows details of the operation management process during menu display. When the effect button 13 is pressed, the “process at the time of operation of the effect button” is performed (S3201 = YES, S3202), and when the direction key 75 is pressed, the “process at the time of the operation of the direction key” is performed (S3201 = NO, S3207). = YES, S3208), an effect process corresponding to the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is performed.

  In FIG. 40, when the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is operated and the effect button operation process or the direction key operation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S3203, the no-operation timer is set to 20 seconds, and the demonstration starts. The timer is set to 180 seconds (S3204), and the process proceeds to step S3205. Then, it is determined whether or not the no-operation timer is zero. If the no-operation timer is not zero (S3205: NO), the process exits the operation management process during menu display as it is, and if the no-operation timer is zero (S3205: YES), a menu display end process (S3206) is performed and a demo is performed. Perform the start process of the screen (during customer waiting production).

(Panel ranking display processing: FIG. 41)
The payout ranking display processing of FIG. 41 shows processing (payout ranking display processing) when the menu item “real sunrise ball ranking 102f” shown in FIG. 43 is determined as one of the processing at the time of the direction key operation ( S3301).

  The payout ranking display is a payout ranking screen from power-on to the first big hit. Here, in the case of the setting change confirmed background image display (S2104), the setting change confirmed character background image is displayed, and in the case of the morning normal background image display (S2109), the morning normal character background image is displayed.

  However, in the present embodiment, the payout ranking screen for the second and subsequent big hits (in the second big hit, the character background image determined by the character background image lottery is displayed) is the last ending effect (during the big hit end INT). ), The same character background image as the background image displayed in) is displayed. Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the settings change suggestion effects described above (Asaichi Gakkun Notice, Asaichi Background Change Notice, Notice of Rollout Ranking), when an unusual effect appears, the setting change is made (there is a setting change). It has been described that the information is definitely sent. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may include a fake effect (gase effect). For example, the movable body operates, and the same operation as the morning notice is generated, but its reliability is less than 100%. In the case of this mode, for example, in the above-mentioned morning one-gakkun notice execution lottery (S2331 in FIG. 35), for example, 80% of the genuine lucky notice prize is won, 10% of the lucky lucky notice is awarded, and the loss (default operation) is 10%. do it. In this case, even if a Gackn notice occurs, it is not a definitive notification, and therefore, a guess element that "there is a high possibility of a setting change" can be given to the player side. In this way, by informing the player that "the setting may have been changed", a new setting guess element is generated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Setting suggestion effects: FIGS. 45 to 47>
In the above description, the setting change suggestion effect is caused by the activation of the first effect in the morning, but in the present embodiment, how many current setting values (internal setting values) are further generated as a result of the setting change. The effect “setting suggestion effect” for presenting an element (setting inferring element) useful for estimating whether or not the numerical value is set is also possible to appear.

  FIG. 45 shows a series of game progresses from the “waiting for customers” state to the “big hit” through the “symbol changing” state, and the type of setting suggestion effect performed during that time, at the appearance time of the effect. It is shown separately. FIG. 46 is an enlarged view of the left side, and FIG. 47 is an enlarged view of the right side.

(Upper column of FIG. 45, FIG. 47)
Explaining each period of the game progress, in “waiting for customer”, “initialization (timing 01 to 02)” of the frame and board role → the menu notification and the volume / light amount notification “operation notification (timing 03)” ->04)->"Demo (timing 05-07)" that introduces a model introduction, company logo, and immersion alert--"Menu screen (timing 05-07)" that displays the menu screen divided into the first layer and the second layer The period of "" transits.

  The pattern “changing” is divided into “before reach”, “after reach”, and “after reach” periods. In the period before the reach, the symbol "winning (change start) (timing 10)", which is the point at which the game ball has won and the symbol change has started, is a period in which the symbol has undergone low-speed change or high-speed change and the first symbol has stopped. Periods such as “low-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, first symbol stop (timing 11 to 13)” and “pseudo-run (timing 14 to 16)” in which pseudo fluctuation is performed 1 to 3 times can be changed. In the period after the reach, for example, in the case of “second symbol stop (timing 17)” in which the second symbol for forming the reach state is stopped → “normal reach (timing 18)” occurring as a hitting hit → SP reach In the case of "SPSP Reach", which indicates the development from normal reach to SP Reach, which indicates "development (reach title announcement)" and "falling down" Each stage period (timing 19 to 21) such as “development of development” suggesting the development to the future may be included.

  Further, in the case of the strong SP reach (SPSP reach), a period of “promotion of development (reach title notice)” → “promotion of this drop” which indicates the development to SPSP reach is changed (timing 19 to 21). In the “after reach” period, in the case of a specific reach effect, the lost symbol is displayed once, but the decorative symbol re-fluctuates, and all symbols stop at the hit symbol. The period (timing 24 to 25) of “(so-called“ resurrection effect ”)” transitions.

  As described above, “during big hit (during big hit)” includes “opening period”, “round game period (up to the maximum number of rounds)”, and “ending period”, which are divided into these periods in the figure. The “ending” includes “A pattern” and “B pattern”, one of which is selectively used. Here, a big hit with a maximum round number of 7R is handled.

  In the “opening period”, the period of “big hit notification, right-handed instruction effect (timing 26 to 27)” transitions. Next, in the “round game period”, a “battle effect (timing 28 to 31)” of a story-like effect is developed from 1R to 4R among the round games continuing from 1R to 7R. This battle effect is an effect that conceals the current big hit type, and specifically, conceals whether the current big hit is a probable big hit or a time saving big hit. Further, during the round game of the specific round (here, the fourth round), a period in which a “large winning opening winning sound change notice” to be described later, which is one of the setting suggestion effects, can appear (timing 31). ) ". Then, the period of the “Risk Direction (Timing 32)” that informs the victory / defeat of the battle production on the 5R, that is, whether it is a probable jackpot or a time saving jackpot, is changed from 6R to 7R. I do. Subsequently, in the “ending A pattern”, “transition mode display (timing 35 to 36)” and “display of corporate logo (company name) (timing 37)” including mode display and warning of forgetting to remove the IC card are performed. Will be In the “ending B pattern”, a “transition mode display (timing 38 to 39)” including a mode display and a display of an IC forgetting alert, a “momelli including alerting (timing 40)”, and a “corporate logo (company name) ( Timing 41) "is displayed. Transition.

(Type of suggested setting effect: left column in FIG. 45)
The left column of FIG. 45 shows the types of setting suggestion effects that appear during the game progress, that is, during the symbol game. In this embodiment, the following 14 types of setting suggestion effects are prepared. I have. Some of these setting suggestive effects belong to the “fluctuating effect” that appears during the symbol game. Such a setting suggestion effect acts as a notice effect during a change, suggests a degree of expectation that a specific notice effect occurs, or simply suggests a setting without suggesting any of these expectations. There is a thing (setting suggestion effect during fluctuation). For example, the probability that the set value is suggested by the appearance rate of the fluctuating effect or the probability that the predetermined event occurs (appears) at a predetermined timing (for example, after execution of the fluctuating notice effect) is determined according to the set value. There are those that suggest setting values by making them different. On the other hand, there is a type that does not appear during the symbol game but belongs to the “non-fluctuation effect” that appears during a hit game or waiting for a customer (non-fluctuation setting suggestion effect). By providing these various setting suggestion effects, it is possible to increase the fun of the setting guessing element and to improve the entertainment interest of the player. Hereinafter, the setting suggestion effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

(Setting suggestion effect 01: "Ami-kuji, Omi-kuji point suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 01 (effect name: Ami lottery, fortune point suggestion) is a specific setting in a changing section, specifically, in a period (timing 10 to 12) from the start of the change to the stop of the first symbol. When a suggestion image (for example, an acquired image with a specific number of points), for example, “effects in which 50 or 100 P (points) are given by an ami-kuji or omi-kuji” appears (usually 10 P to 50 P), the expectation of the high setting area increases. That is. This “Ami-kuji, Omikuji point suggestion” belongs to a floating production, but belongs to a floating setting suggestion unannounced production in that it does not indicate the winning expectation degree. “Ami-kuji, Omikuji point suggestion” is a special setting suggestion effect in which the transition to menu notification (timing 03) during the waiting period of the customer, that is, during the demonstration (timing 05 to 07), is an appearance condition. Specifically, when the screen is shifted to the menu screen, the menu screen is displayed on condition that the game is won by a predetermined lottery (for example, winning at 1%). Do not execute the lottery. Although shown as the first section of the game progress in FIG. 45 and FIG. 47, this “suggested lottery, fortune lottery suggestion” can appear during the end interval after the big hit.

(Setting suggestion effect 02: "Button rattling notice")
This setting suggestion effect 02 (stage name: button rattle notice) is equivalent to the Gackn notice and does not perform “setting suggestion” as described as a setting difference “None”. It is listed here. Since this setting suggestion effect 02 is equivalent to a gakkun notice that can occur only in the morning, the movable body (normal When the pressing portion of the button 13A or the movable member 73 of the exhilarating button 70 is vibrated or rocked little by little, the player is informed that the setting has been changed (including re-hitting to the same set value) due to the occurrence of the movement. Notify.

(Setting suggestion effect 03: "Normal reach design suggestion (listening tile design notice)")
As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the setting suggestion effect 03 (effect name: normal reach symbol suggestion) is a “reach loss variation pattern designated by N reach” among the reach variation patterns (variation at the time of winning a small hit). May be included), and belongs to the changing setting suggestion announcement effect in terms of an effect mode (notification effect) related to reach fluctuation. In the normal reach symbol suggestion, when the first symbol stops and then the second symbol stops and becomes the normal reach (timing 17 and 18), the listening tile symbol (reach symbol) related to the current set value or finally stops. This is an effect that suggests the current set value by causing the decorative stop symbol (here, the lost symbol after N reach) to appear. For example, "the reach design (for example, Arabic numerals) at the time of N reach becomes larger when the high setting is set" or "decoration stop design" becomes the larger design when the high setting is set. is there. In other words, it is the "announcement of the tile design" which suggests the set value by the tile design (reach design).

  In this example, a listening pattern symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 49 is provided for each set value. Note that the lottery table for the listening tile symbol of FIG. 49 is a simplified table configuration for easy understanding of the present invention. Actually, a lottery table of listening tile symbols corresponding to N Reach 1 and 2 is provided. Even if the N Reach is the same, the symbol lottery result, the number of active balls or a specific set value (for example, 6) is related to the appearance rate of a specific reach symbol according to the N reach type, such as the appearance rate of a specific symbol (for example, 6 symbols) differs between N reach 1 and N reach 2. There are many factors to do.

  The listening tile symbol lottery table has a table configuration capable of determining the type of listening tile symbol so as to reflect the rank of the current set value. That is, in the case of setting 4, the ratio of four symbols is high, in the case of setting 5, the ratio of five symbols is high, and in the case of setting 6, the ratio of six symbols is high.

  In this example, one symbol and seven symbols do not correspond to any set values, that is, in the case of a tile with one symbol or seven symbols, or when stopped in the listening tile state (in the case of a decorative stop symbol “101”), This is a listening tile design with no setting suggestion and no setting suggestion. Therefore, there is no relationship between the set value and the listening of one or seven symbols. For the other listening patterns 2 to 6, the ratio of listening to 2 patterns, 3 patterns, 4 patterns, 5 patterns, and 6 patterns corresponding to the settings 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 is high. . In addition, in the case of the present embodiment, the symbols which can form the reach state, the symbols 1 to 7 work as the above-mentioned "reach configuration symbols".

  This rule of suggesting a normal reach symbol is a rule only in a normal state (low probability, no electricity support state), and is not applied at least in a time saving state accompanied by an electricity support state or in a high probability state. . That is, only during the normal state, the normal reach symbol suggestion can appear. This is because the special figure time saving function is activated during the state with the electric support, and the symbol game is digested faster than in the normal state. Note that during the latent state, since there is no power support, a normal reach symbol suggestion may appear as in the normal state. Conversely, it is considered that the state is in the high base state of high probability, and the normal reach symbol suggestion does not need to appear.

  In addition, in the case where the reach symbols are exchanged in the course of the change, for example, after first listening to two symbols (two reach symbols), it is changed to four auditory tiles (four reach symbols) and the four symbols are reached. In the case where the audience tile loses (for example, “434” is the final stop symbol), the decorative stop symbol (434) stopped by the loss is regarded as the normal reach symbol. The above-mentioned "normal reach symbol suggestion" is a special setting suggestion that determines whether or not to appear depending on the game state, the jackpot lottery probability state, or the game state and the jackpot lottery probability state. It can also be said to be directing.

  Also, in this embodiment, the N reach type is targeted for the listening tile design notice, for the following reason. N-reach is a notice effect (reach effect) in which the appearance rate is higher than SP reach and, therefore, the expectation of winning is relatively low. Therefore, usually, when only N reach occurs, the player has almost no expectation of winning the jackpot, and receives an impression of digestive game like a mere loss change, and in the advanced game player, There are many cases where it is annoying to be one of the productions during the changing of the angle. However, in the normal reach symbol suggestion, there is a possibility that the setting suggestion is made at the time of N reach, and when the N reach appears, the player becomes interested in the reach symbol and the decoration stop symbol. As a result, the N-reach fluctuation is less likely to take on a digestive game aspect, and the player's motivation and interest in playing can be improved. Note that one or more SP reach types may be targeted for the listening tile design notice. When targeting SP reach, the following effects are obtained. SP reach, contrary to N reach, has a low appearance rate and a relatively high expectation of winning. Therefore, if the SP reach occurs, the player has a great sense of winning expectation. However, if the result is "losing", the degree of disappointment is high because of high expectations. However, if the setting is suggested at the time of the loss, the player becomes interested in the loss at the time of the SP reach. As a result, the degree of discouragement at the time of SP reach loss can be reduced, and the player's motivation and interest can be improved.

(Setting suggestion effect 04: "Danger pattern title loss")
The setting suggestion effect 04 (effect name: danger pattern title loss) is, for example, one mode of a title announcement effect relating to SP reach or SPSP reach (hereinafter, referred to as “SP reach title announcement”) (timing 19, 22). ). This SP reach title notice indicates, for example, that the background image related to the title display changes to blue, green, red, D pattern (danger pattern), or rainbow color (probable), thereby indicating the degree of expectation of winning. In this regard, "Danger pattern title loss" belongs to the setting suggestion announcement effect during the change. In particular, a title notice with a danger pattern background (hereinafter abbreviated as "D pattern notice") indicates the highest degree of expectation of winning during the title notice, except for a rainbow-colored background that is certain.

  When the D pattern notice appears, as shown in FIG. 48B, the set value is referred to, and the winning expectation degree at the time of appearance of the D pattern notice is changed according to the set value, and the set value is high. The more the D pattern notice appears, the lower the expectation of winning. More specifically, when the D pattern notice appears and the current game is lost, “setting 2 or more is determined”, and in the high setting area (settings 5 and 6), the expectation of winning the D pattern notice decreases. That is. Hereinafter, the winning expectation at the appearance of the D pattern notice is referred to as “D pattern expectation”.

  In general, when a high expectation notice appears, the player expects a big hit. However, even if the notice appeared, if it became "losing", the disappointment degree was large because the expectation was large, the willingness to play decreased, and `` though it should be highly reliable, The impression that "there was no big hit" remains strong, and distrust of the gaming machine increases. However, since the D pattern notice is a notice effect in which the higher the set value, the expected winning degree decreases, even if the D notice has been lost due to the appearance of the D notice, “Setting 1 is negative. "Setting 2 or more has been confirmed!" If it is found that the value is not the minimum set value, the degree of discouragement of the player is reduced, which leads to an improvement in the desire to play. Furthermore, if the D pattern notice appears and loses more than once, the possibility of an increasingly high setting area increases, so the D pattern notice appears and expects to win a big hit. It is a special setting suggestion that can create a contradictory expectation.

Regarding the appearance rate of the D pattern notice, for example, when a D pattern notice at the time of strong SP reach loss appears, the D pattern notice appearance rate at the time of strong SP reach loss is set to 0% (not appear), and other settings are set. 2 is 5%, setting 3 is 10%, setting 4 is 15%, setting 5 is 20%, setting 6 is 50%, and so on. The higher the setting value, the higher the appearance rate of the D pattern notice at the time of the loss. And the lottery form in which the D pattern notice appearance rate at the time of the strong SP reach big hit is "the same or substantially the same appearance rate at each set value" is as follows.
(A) If the D pattern notice appears at the time of the strong SP reach, in the case of the setting 1, it is accurate at that time (because the D pattern notice does not appear at the time of loss). On the other hand, in the case of the settings 2 to 6, it is not accurate, but the higher the setting, the lower the expectation of winning. In this sense, the set value 1 has a higher expectation of winning than the set value 6. Also, in the case of the setting 1, it is probable, so that the D pattern notice has both the function of setting suggestion and the function of the probable effect. Note that the loss appearance rate may be set to 0% for a plurality of specific set values (for example, settings 1 to 3). In this case, the settings 1 to 3 are denied by “D pattern notice appearance → loss” (setting 4 or more is fixed), but in the case of the settings 1 to 3, “D pattern notice present time” is definite.
(B) In the case of “strong SP reach D pattern notice appearance → loss”, setting 1 is denied (D pattern notice does not appear when setting 1 is lost), that is, setting 2 or more is determined and , A setting inference factor that the setting may be high. Then, as the notice of the D pattern appears and the loss is repeated, the expectation of the high setting area increases.

  As described above, in the D pattern notice, the possibility of setting 6 increases as the loss frequency increases, that is, the higher the setting, the lower the degree of expectation of the D pattern. However, although the higher the setting, the lower the expectation of the D pattern, the lower the expectation of the D pattern at the appearance of the notice of the D pattern is actually set to a high expectation of about 65%. At the time of appearance, the expectation of winning can be greatly fueled.

  In addition, in the D pattern notice according to the present embodiment, the D pattern notice with different appearance timings can be generated in a complex manner in the same symbol game, and the notice effect with the D pattern appears twice. Is determined to be “winning (big hit winning determination)” at that time. For example, in the case of "D pattern notice appears at the time of SP reach title notice (first D notice) → D notice at the time of SPSP reach title notice (second D notice)", the first D notice The advance notice serves as a setting suggestion effect, but since the second D pattern announcement is “probable” at the present time, the second D pattern announcement does not function as a setting suggestion effect. In the case of this example, the second D pattern notice functions as a notice effect (here, a certain effect). In other words, a special setting suggestion effect that does not function as a setting suggestion effect depending on the appearance timing, even for the same type D notice. If the D pattern notice appears during the time saving state or the probable change state, the lottery of the D pattern notice as a setting suggestion effect is not performed because it is determined to be accurate.

(Setting Suggestion Direction 05: “Change”)
This setting suggestion effect 05 (effect name: hit change) is a player-participation type setting suggestion effect that appears at the time of hitting after the SPSP reach (timing 23). A word image (conversation effect) is displayed together with the image display, and a button image (operation instruction effect) for urging the user to press the effect button 13 is displayed. If the wording is a specific wording different from normal, the type of the specific wording is displayed. The setting is suggested in accordance with. For example, if the specific wording is "try to hit all at once?", "Set 2 or more?" Press ?? "is" Confirmation 6 ". In the present embodiment, when this specific wording occurs, a specific big hit type (for example, a probability variable big hit) is further determined. In particular, in the case where "Press the refresh button once?" Appears, the movable body 73 performs a rolling operation, the inside of the empty frame emits a rainbow-colored light, and the effect content is to congratulate the user with the certainty-changing big hit and setting 6 decision. This “falling change” belongs to the setting suggestion announcement effect during the change similarly to the setting suggestion effect 04 (Danger pattern title loss) in that the probability change big hit is announced in advance.

(Setting suggestion effect 06: "Grand prize mouth winning sound change")
FIG. 48 (c) shows an outline of the setting suggestion effect 06 (effect name: big winning opening winning sound change). In the present embodiment, in the round game during the big hit game, when a game ball wins at the big winning port 50, a sound effect (a big winning port winning sound) appears, but the specific R-th ( At the specific count (here, when the fifth prize is awarded) in the round game (timing 31) of the 4R-th round game (here, when the fifth prize is awarded), the normal “default sound (normal large prize mouth winning prize sound)” is different from “ When a specific sound (special prize mouth winning sound) sounds, that is, when there is a change in the winning sound from the default sound "Pilo ♪" to the specific sound "Pup-on ♪", the setting suggestion is given accordingly. This is a setting suggestion effect (a large winning prize mouth winning sound change notice). The change in the winning sound of the big winning opening is a thing that appears during the big hit game, and has no function of a notice effect, suggests only the setting, and is not a changing effect. Suggested unannounced production ". The concept of the “specific sound” includes not only a sound without a message but also a voice of words having a specific meaning.

<Example of control: Big winning opening winning command reception processing>
FIG. 50 shows a control example of the change of the winning prize mouth winning sound. When the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the above-mentioned “winning prize mouth winning command” at the time of winning the win 50 from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) analyzes the win prize winning command, and includes the number of prize balls included therein. Information and the like are obtained (S2551). As described above, this prize ball number information is used for counting the “total number of balls to be played at the time of consecutive play” in the ranking display (FIG. 44).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a specific round (4R) and whether or not it is a specific count number (fifth prize) (S2552 to S2553). (S2552 = NO, S2553 = NO), the effect data of the default sound (normal sound) is set (S2558). On the other hand, if it is the specific round and the specific count number (YES in both S2552 and S2553), the setting value information is acquired (S2554), and a special winning opening winning sound change notice lottery process is executed (S2555). Here, with reference to the special winning opening winning sound selection table shown in FIG. 51 (a), it is determined by lottery whether to use the default sound or the specific sound in accordance with the set value. It should be noted that numerical values in the illustrated table indicate distribution values, and “distribution value / size of lottery area” is a lottery probability of a default sound or a specific sound.

  In the special winning opening winning sound selection table, the appearance rate of the specific sound according to the set value is defined as shown in the figure. As can be seen from FIG. 51A, in the case of the setting 1, no specific sound is emitted. In other words, as long as a specific sound is generated, “setting 2 or more is fixed” is suggested. In addition, when attention is paid to the settings 2 to 6, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability that the specific sound is generated. In other words, the greater the number of occurrences of the specific sound, the higher the possibility of the high setting range.

  In the case of winning in the special winning opening winning sound change announcement lottery, that is, in the case of winning a specific sound (S2556: YES), the effect data for the specific sound is set (S2557), and in the case of loss, that is, the default sound In the case of winning (S2556: NO), effect data for default sound is set (S2558). Then, the process exits the special winning opening winning command receiving process. Thereby, a winning sound is output. As described above, when a game ball wins in a special winning opening (specific winning opening) during a hit game, the effect control unit 24 performs a plurality of types of sound effects (for example, a normal winning sound, a specific winning sound for setting suggestion). A function section for controlling the appearance of either of them is provided. In addition, there is provided a setting effect control means capable of controlling the appearance of a setting suggestion effect (large winning opening winning sound change) indicating a setting value based on the appearance rate of the specific sound.

  In the present example, if the specific sound “Pop-n ♪” sounds at the fifth count of the fourth round, it is determined that the setting is “2 or more”. However, the fact that the specific sound “Pup-on ♪” did not sound does not deny the possibility that the setting is 2 or more. For example, setting 1 = normal sound (default) 100%, setting 2 = normal sound (default) 98%, setting 3 = normal sound (default) 96%, setting 4 = normal sound (default) 94%. That is, different lotteries are performed depending on the set values. The setting suggestion effect (specific sound) due to the winning sound change does not appear in the setting 1, but appears in the settings 2 to 6. The setting suggestion effect (specific sound) is intended for all jackpots, and may occur at the 5th count of 4R in each jackpot. In the case where a plurality of special winning openings are provided, the setting suggesting effect (specific sound) may be common to the plurality of special winning openings or may be different. In the present example, the 4R (the round immediately before the effect produced as a result of the battle effect) is targeted for the change of the winning prize mouth winning sound, but it is preferable to target the 5R result effect (timing 32). The reason is as follows. In the case of a defeat production (a production that appears during a time savings jackpot and announces a shift to a reduction in time) in the result production, in the case of a player who faces a battle production result with a certainty of expectation and a certain probability of intrusion, Is eroded, causing a decrease in the desire to play. Therefore, even if the resulting production is a defeat production, if a big winning opening winning sound change occurs, the setting is suggested, and the player's willingness to play can be improved. In addition, it may be determined whether or not to execute the special winning opening winning sound change according to the effect result. For example, it does not execute in the case of a victory effect, but executes in the case of a defeat effect. In this case, a special setting suggestion that a setting suggestion effect appears depending on whether or not a specific effect (here, an effect other than the notice effect, one of the hit effects) is executed. Become a director. In other words, it is a special setting suggestion effect in which whether or not to appear is determined according to the type of hit (here, depending on whether it is a probable big hit or a time saving big hit).

(Modification example C1 of the change in the winning prize sound)
As a modified example C1, a large winning opening winning prize sound change announcement lottery process (S2555) may be executed each time a prize is won in the specific round. That is, in the case of the modified example C1, every time a winning prize is awarded, a chance to generate a specific sound is generated, and a chance of inferring a setting suggestion increases. FIG. 51 (b) is a special winning mouth winning sound selection table of the modification C1. As shown in FIG. 51, as in the case of FIG. 51 (a), the occurrence probability of a specific sound according to the set value is determined. In the case of this modified example C1, the process of S2553 may be omitted. The specific round may not be one round, but may be all rounds (timing 28 to 34) or a plurality of rounds (either continuous or intermittent). For example, it is between 5-7R (timing 32-34), even round (2nd, 4th, 6th R (timing 29, 31, 33)).

(Variation C2 of the winning prize sound change)
Further, as a modified example C2, when there is a winning (over winning) exceeding the maximum winning number (10) in the specific round (eleventh winning), a special winning opening winning sound change notice lottery process is executed. It may be configured. That is, when a specific sound (a sound different from a normal over-winning sound) sounds during the over-winning, the setting is suggested. FIG. 51 (c) shows a special winning port winning sound selection table of this modified example C2. In the lottery table of FIG. 51 (c), similarly to FIG. 51 (a), the occurrence probability of the specific sound according to the set value is determined. In the case of the modified example C2, the process of S2553 may be replaced with a process of determining whether or not an over-winning is achieved. The over-winning prize does not occur frequently in design. Therefore, not only in the specific round, but also the special winning opening winning sound change announcement lottery may be executed in all rounds (for example, 1 to 7R) or a part of a plurality of rounds (for example, 5R to 7R).

(Modification example C3 of the winning prize mouth winning sound change)
Further, in the above description, the special winning opening winning sound change notice is executed for all the big hits, but it may be configured to execute only one or a plurality of specific big hits. For example, a jackpot that is executed only with a probability change jackpot, only with a time saving jackpot, or with a specific maximum number of rounds (for example, 16R) that is executed only with a jackpot that determines a power support state is executed. It is executed with a big hit and / or a time saving big hit, a big hit (probable big hit and / or a latent big hit) which triggers a transition to a high probability, and the like.

(Modification example of the change in the winning sound of the winning prize mouth C4)
The specific sound of the present embodiment or the modification C1 may be, for example, an over-winning sound at the time of over-winning. Further, the specific sound in the modified example C3 may be a normal sound. In this case, the normal sound appears to give the player a sense of discomfort irrespective of the over prize, so that "setting suggestion by a discomfort effect" can be performed. Further, in the present embodiment and the modified examples C1 to C4, the setting suggestion using the specific sound has been described. However, the setting suggestion may be performed using a silent sound instead of emitting the specific sound. In this case as well, an uncomfortable effect that no prize sound is produced even when a prize is won can be made to function as a setting suggestion effect. In addition, the change in the winning sound of the grand prize mouth is directed to a winning sound (sound effect), but the setting is suggested using another effect (at least one of a light effect, a movable object effect, and an image display effect). It can be performed. Further, a configuration in which at least one of a light effect dedicated to setting suggestion, a movable object effect, and an image display effect can be displayed in addition to the normal sound may be employed.

(Setting suggestion effect 07: "End interval screen change")
This setting suggestion effect 07 (effect name: end interval screen change) is “at the time of transition mode display (timing 35 or 38)” in the end interval section of the jackpot, specifically, at a predetermined timing during the ending effect, In the "air battle entry screen (probable change state transition screen)" (the "air battle entry" screen in FIG. 53) displayed as the end screen (end interval screen), a character image (for example, a specific object display) and / or a suggestion are displayed. This is a setting suggestion effect (ending screen change notice) in which a color image (for example, background image color) appears and the setting is suggested based on the content. The change of the end interval screen also belongs to the non-fluctuating effect, similarly to the change of the winning prize sound. Note that, in this example, the “air battle entry screen” is displayed in the case of a probability change big hit (specific big hit). However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of a jackpot and / or a time-saving jackpot, or in the case of a jackpot that defines a specific maximum number of rounds (for example, 16R), or in the case of a jackpot (probable jackpot and / or latent jackpot) that triggers the transition to a high probability May be displayed.

  In this setting suggestion effect 07 (end interval screen change), if the character image and / or the suggestion color image appearing on the air battle entry screen are "specific images" different from the normal "default image", that is, the big hit end When the screen changes from the “default big hit end screen” to the “specific big hit end screen”, it is assumed that there is a setting suggestion. The content of the setting suggestion is to suggest the setting according to the type of the specific image in the air battle entry screen.

  Images such as characters and suggested colors appearing in the air battle entry screen are replaced at the time of big hits, and change by default according to the number of extended games, but the type or combination of appearing images is the same as the basic pattern . When a lottery for deciding whether or not to activate the setting suggestion effect (for example, an ED character background effect lottery process (S2514) in FIG. 58 described later) is won, a specific character image different from the default character image is obtained. The characters displayed on the big hit end interval screen are displayed in the same variation (for example, combination) on the payout ranking display (FIG. 44) on the demo screen, and the character images on the payout ranking display ((A) to FIG. 53). (F) is also rewritten. Therefore, in the case where the above-described announcement of the payout ranking (FIG. 44 (b)) is executed, after the first big hit game, the payout ranking display relating to the first payout middle morning notice is updated in the morning, and the big hit game starts. At the same time, the announcement in the morning first ball ranking will be ended.

  FIG. 52 shows combinations of character images appearing on the air battle entry screen (the “air battle entry” screen in FIG. 53) and / or the types of suggested color images and the contents of setting suggestions based on them. FIG. 53 shows a part corresponding to these. In this embodiment, both the character image and the suggested color image are handled as specific images, but only one of them may be handled. The air battle entry screen according to the change of the end interval screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53.

First, the outline of the setting suggestion content based on the change of the end interval screen will be described. For example, it is possible to adopt an effect mode that suggests settings such as the following (A) to (S).
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that indicates a low setting area (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3).
(C) “High setting suggestion effect” indicating a high setting area (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, and 5 to 6).
(G) “Even number setting suggestion effect” suggesting even number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(U) “Odd number setting suggestion effect” that indicates an odd number setting (settings 1, 3, and 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that definitely notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, “setting N finalizing effect” that definitely notifies “setting N”.
(M) "Specific setting negative effect" that definitely notifies that the setting value is not a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests a set value of a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α ≦ set value ≦ β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α ≦ set value) are suggested, and random values of “setting 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested.
As can be seen from FIG. 52, setting suggestion effects belonging to all the types (A) to (S) can be displayed on the “air battle entry screen (end interval screen change)”. These contents are not limited to the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07). In other setting suggestive effects (setting suggestion effects 01 to 06, 08 to 14), an effect mode in which the suggestion contents of at least one (all or a part thereof) of the above (A) to (S) is provided. Can be.

  In FIG. 52, two main characters are displayed on the left and right of the basic pattern on the screen. For example, in FIG. 53A, the combination of the left character and the right character of the ED effect number 2 indicates “fighter C, no character + blue background”, and is one of the default images. This default image may have any of settings 1 to 6 (see ED effect numbers 1 and 2), and the selectivity is the same for each set value. That is, no setting suggestion is made just by the appearance of the default image (setting not suggested). In FIG. 52, the selection rates in the settings 1 to 6 are as shown on the right.

53 (B) to 53 (F) show a part of the specific image in FIG. 52 picked up. For example,
The “fighter D, fighter G + green background” of the effect number 6 for ED shown in FIG. 53 (B) indicates the settings 2, 4, and 6 of the above (g), and the “even number setting” of the above (g). Proposal Direction ".
The “ED no effect, no character, no rainbow background” of the ED effect number 10 shown in FIG. 53 (C) is to definitely notify the setting 6, and to the “specific setting final effect” in the above (M). Belong.
The “fighter E, fighter C + black background” of the ED effect number 13 shown in FIG. 53 (D) indicates that setting 3 is negative, and belongs to the above “(specific setting negative effect)”.
The “fighter G, fighter E + gold background” of the ED effect number 17 shown in FIG. 53 (E) indicates a setting of 3 or more and belongs to the “specific range suggestion effect” of (b).
"Fujimaru-kun, no character + golden background" of ED effect number 11 shown in FIG. 53 (F) indicates setting 4 or more (settings 4, 5, and 6 confirmed), and the "specification" in (b) above. Range suggestion effect ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when suggesting a setting to a player who does not know the character used for the setting suggestion or a game beginner who does not know much about the content of the setting suggesting effect itself, the following support-type is suggested. The setting suggestion effect (semi-setting suggestion effect) can be made to appear. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

In FIG. 52, the contents of the support setting suggestion from the viewpoint of the character image and the background color are the following contents (D) to (C).
(D) In principle, one character appears = nothing is suggested (non-setting suggestion: default system). However, even if only one character appears, a character image with a high appearance rate (a weapon image of a fighter, a tank, etc.) has no idea (recall from the image, meaning associated with the image). If a different character image (anime character image of Fujimaru-kun, Fujika-chan, etc.) appears, there is some setting suggestion or confirmation (for example, suggesting that "the possibility of a high setting region is high").
(E) Two characters appear = There is some setting suggestion or confirmation.
(M) Character does not appear = setting N is determined (in the example shown, the maximum setting is 6).
(C) The background color has the following suggestions. “Blue background” = “not suggesting anything (non-setting suggestion)”, “green background” = “even number setting value” or “odd number setting value” or “specific setting value including setting 1” (Indicating some setting), “black background” = “not a specific setting”, “gold background” = “more than a specific setting other than setting 1”, “rainbow background” = "The highest setting is 6."
The above (d) is intended for players and beginners who do not know the names of weapons and the like. Also, the "background color" is intended to make its role easier to understand. This is also easier to understand and use a background color that is easier to understand and understand than setting guess (comparable to high degree of difficulty) including a combination of complicated characters. The color type informs the game beginner that there is some setting suggestion (the discrimination difficulty is low). These contents are not limited to the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07), and at least one of the above (d) to (c) in other setting suggestion effects (setting suggestion effects 01 to 06, 08 to 14). (All or a part thereof) may be in a production mode in which the contents of suggestions can be reported. Also, the combination of the above (A) to (S) can be determined as appropriate.

(Setting suggestion effect 08: "Blessing love voice")
The setting suggestion effect 08 (effect name: Blessing Ai Voice) is “when the logo is displayed (timing 35 to 37 or timing 38 to 41)” in the end interval section of the jackpot, specifically, an ending effect related to the probability change jackpot. It appears at a predetermined timing in the middle (after the transition mode is displayed), and is one of the player participation type setting suggestion effects using the exhilaration button 70, and rarely appears (for example, the appearance rate is 1%). ) Setting suggestion production. This congratulations voice also belongs to the non-fluctuating effect, as in the above-mentioned large winning opening winning sound change and end interval change. In the blessing ai voice, as a sound effect, a voice (voice) of a specific character that congratulates the probable transition is played (probable intrusion blessing effect), but the setting suggests that the voice is different from the default. For example, voice 1 is “setting 2 or more”, voice 2 is “even number setting”, voice 3 is “odd number setting”, voice 4 is “setting 3 or more”, and voice 5 is “setting 6 finalized”. Regarding which voice is output, that is, what kind of suggestion content is set as the setting suggestion effect mode, as in the lottery mode shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode related to the set value is determined by a predetermined lottery. The determination may be made (the same applies to the setting suggestion effects 09 to 11 and 14 to be described later, and description thereof will be omitted below). The blessing meeting voice (sound effect) can appear simultaneously or redundantly with the change of the end interval (image display effect), and a clearer guess can be made from both setting suggestions.

(Setting suggestion effect 09: "Conversation notice suggestion")
The setting suggestion effect 09 (the effect name: “conversation notice suggestion”) is one of the so-called “step-up notice effects” that can appear during the period from the start of winning before reaching the first symbol stop (timing 10 to 13). Is provided. This step-up notice effect changes in stages from the first stage (SU1) effect to a plurality of stage effects, and when the stage is further advanced, the expectation of winning is increased (the stage has been advanced to the final stage). In this case, the winning expectation degree is the highest). The conversation announcement suggestion is one of the conversational productions, but is not a player participation type like the above-mentioned hit change (setting suggestion production 05), but is a normal conversational production in which the production scenario progresses stepwise with time. is there. This conversation advance notice suggests a setting based on the difference in the dialogue of the character displayed at a specific stage (for example, SU1), and is similar to the above-mentioned blessing love voice (setting suggestion effect 08) (see FIG. In this example, the image display effect is an effect mode in which setting suggestion is performed in accordance with the type of one or more types of specific speech images.

(Setting suggestion effect 10: “Constant rotation speed lamp setting suggestion”)
This setting suggestion effect 10 (effect name: constant rotation speed lamp setting suggestion) can appear when the number of times of execution of the symbol game reaches a predetermined number, and belongs to a change setting suggestion non-announcement effect. The constant rotation speed lamp setting suggestion is, for example, a predetermined timing during the symbol game when the symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times, such as the number of rotations from the time of turning on the power, the number of rotations from the previous big hit, etc. (Timings 10 to 25), the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined color, and the setting is suggested by the difference in the emitted color. For example, blue light emission is "setting 2 or more determined", yellow light emission is "even number setting", green light emission is "odd number setting", red light emission is "setting 4 or more determined", and rainbow color is "setting 6 determined". The configuration is not limited to the light effect, and the setting may be suggested using another effect (at least one of a sound effect, an image display effect, and a movable object effect).

(Setting suggestion effect 11: "Specific design suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 11 (effect name: specific symbol suggestion) can appear at the first symbol stop to the second symbol stop (timing 13 to 15, 17) before the reach. For example, when performing a pseudo ream , A decorative symbol type at the first stop (first stop symbol), and a symbol combination type of the decorative symbol at the first stop and the decorative symbol at the second stop (hereinafter referred to as “first stop symbol”). The second stop is abbreviated), and setting suggestion is made by setting a difference in the appearance rate. The specific symbol suggestion relates to a fluctuating effect related to a pseudo-run, a normal fluctuation, and a reach fluctuation, and belongs to a fluctuating setting suggestion notice effect. As a specific example of the specific symbol suggestion, for example, in the normal fluctuation, “when the even symbol (2, 4, 6) is likely to appear at the first stop, the possibility of setting the even number is high, and the odd symbol (1, 3 5) is likely to appear in the first stop, there is a high possibility of setting an odd number "," If one symbol is likely to appear in the first stop symbol, the setting 2 or more will be rich "," Special If the symbol stops, the setting 6 is determined "," the first and second stops are specific stops ", and the like. As the specific stop eye, a continuous eye (for example, “12”, “34”, “56”, etc.), a pinch eye (for example, “13”, “24”, “35”, etc.), a specific eye (for example, The maximum symbol combination is “17” or “71”. Also, in the case of a pseudo-run, as in the same event, setting suggestion is made based on what kind of symbol type the pseudo-variation is executed. For example, when the appearance rate of the temporary stop including “1 symbol” is high at the time of the temporary stop, “the setting 2 or more becomes rich”, and when the pseudo variation is executed at the temporary stop including “7 symbol” In the case where the pseudo variation is executed in a specific symbol other than the default, "setting 6 is fixed" is indicated. In addition, a specific symbol is not suggested in a pseudo-run with a high number of pseudo-changes. This is because in the case of a high number (here, three times) of pseudo-runs, the degree of expectation of winning is high, suggesting the occurrence of SPSP reach, and other noticeable productions being combined, and as a lively production, Is increased, and it is difficult to determine whether the setting suggestion or the winning expectation degree is suggested, and there is a risk that the effect may be rather troublesome due to the confusion of the players.

(Setting suggestion effect 12: "Reach appearance rate change")
The setting suggestion effect 12 (effect name: reach appearance rate change) indicates setting suggestion based on the appearance rate of a specific reach, and belongs to a setting suggestion announcement effect during fluctuation. In the reach appearance rate change, setting suggestion is performed based on a difference in the appearance rate of a specific fluctuation pattern. For example, when a specific SP reach has appeared, “setting 2 or more is determined”, and when the specific SP reach has a high probability or a low probability, the probability of setting N is high (low ) ". The reach appearance rate change is realized by making the selectivity of a specific change pattern different according to the set value in the change pattern distribution table, that is, providing a setting difference in the selectivity of the specific change pattern. (See S413 in FIG. 21). How the appearance rate of a specific variation pattern is to be determined can be appropriately determined according to the setting suggestion content. For example, as the set value increases, the selectivity of the reach variation pattern specified by the specific SP reach is relatively increased, or conversely, the selectivity is relatively decreased, or in the case of a specific set value Is to make the appearance rate 0%. In the case of this embodiment, one or more types of specific SP reach are targeted for the reach appearance rate change (timing 19 to 23).

(Setting suggestion effect 13: "Stop lamp setting suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 13 (effect name: stop sound lamp setting suggestion) is displayed when the decorative symbol after the end of the reach is temporarily stopped (while fluctuating before the final display) or when the decorative stop symbol is displayed (timing 25). This is a setting change suggestion effect that uses the "effect at the time of symbol stop" that is issued. The stop sound lamp setting suggestion does not particularly indicate the expected degree of winning, and in this regard, it belongs to the setting suggestion unannounced production during the change. This stop-time sound lamp setting suggestion indicates that when the decorative symbol is stopped (either during the temporary stop state or when the final display is performed), the effect mode at the time of the stop is a specific effect mode different from normal. In addition, the setting is suggested (at least one of a sound effect, a light effect, an image display effect, and a movable object effect can be used). For example, normally, a sound effect that the stop sound at the time of final determination is “Pon ♪” (or may be silence) appears, but the sound effect is a specific stop sound different from normal, for example, “Dokan!” Indicates "setting 2 or more" and "Dadada! (Machine gun sound)" indicates "setting 4 or more". The stop sound lamp setting suggestion may be configured to appear only during a specific period. For example, when the number of executions of the symbol game after turning on the power reaches a predetermined number of revolutions (for example, a total of 2,000 rotations), or in a game period until the number of times reaches a specific number of times after the predetermined number of times (for example, a total of after the number of rotations of 2001) Or every 20 rotations after the 2001th rotation), on a specific day or within a specific time according to the RTC information.

(Setting suggestion effect 14: "Re-lottery suggestion")
This setting suggestion effect 14 (effect name: re-lottery suggestion) is a setting suggestion effect that can appear at the time of re-lottery after the end of the reach (timing 24). This "re-lottery" means that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the big hit symbol at the end of the reach, and then is re-displayed from the temporary stopped state (the symbol may be converted and displayed), and then the big hit symbol (temporary This is an effect mode that uses a so-called “re-lottery effect” that definitely displays the same or different big hit symbol as that at the time of stop. The re-lottery suggestion is to make a setting suggestion while informing the probable state, but to be precise, since the big hit is not determined until the end of the symbol game, in this regard, it is said that it belongs to the setting suggestion announcement during fluctuation. I can say. However, the re-lottery effect involves the re-display of the decorative symbol, but is an effect after derivation of a game result in which a hit has been determined, and is executed in a state in which the hit has not been determined. "Pseudo fluctuation"). In the re-lottery suggestion, for example, the setting suggestion is that the appearance rate of the big hit symbol displayed at the time of temporary stop differs according to the set value, or the big hit symbol at the time of final display after the re-lottery differs according to the set value, etc. Do. For example, as in the case of the above-described normal reach symbol suggestion (setting suggestion effect 03), there is a setting difference in the displayed decorative symbol (here, the big hit symbol at the time of temporary stop or after the re-lottery). However, in the case where the type of the big hit is notified according to the big hit symbol, such as the odd symbol pattern is a probability variable jackpot (probable variable symbol) and the even symbol is a time saving big hit (time saving symbol), the player falls off. In order not to cause a feeling, if the temporary stop time is a probable change symbol, the re-lottery suggestion is not executed, or, for example, the “probability change symbol“ 111 ”is temporarily stopped → a probable change symbol (333, 555) having a larger number than“ 111 ” , Etc.), it is preferable to suggest setting suggestion that “setting 2 or more is finalized”.

<Variation in lottery rate of setting suggestion effect: FIG. 54>
In the setting suggestion effect, the appearance ratio (also referred to as an appearance ratio, appearance ratio, and execution ratio) is not always constant, and as shown in FIG. 54, at a predetermined change timing, the appearance ratio, that is, the lottery probability (setting suggestion probability) There is a feature that the basis of the appearance rate of the effect is changed (fluctuated) (setting estimation element variable lottery form). In short, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the appearance rate changes, that is, changes (changes) from a predetermined low probability to a high probability or from a high probability to a low probability. The change conditions include the arrival (start) and progress (end) of a predetermined game period, the occurrence of a specific event or the number of occurrences thereof, time information, and the like.

(About change timing (change opportunity))
FIG. 54 shows an outline of the change timing. The change timing includes, for example, the following (A) to (E).
(A) An embodiment in which the time is changed according to the time (including date and time or date or time) using the RTC or the soft counter, or the elapsed time from the power ON (see FIG. 54A).
(B) A form that varies according to the game result information. More specifically, the form varies according to the number of out balls (the so-called “hit amount”) (see FIG. 54B).
(C) A form that varies according to the number of big hits (the number of big hits or the number of big hit games executed). For example, a form that varies between XX times to △△ times or XX times or more.
(D) A mode that varies according to the number of revolutions since the previous big hit (the number of times the symbol game has been executed since the last big hit). For example, the form can be changed between XX rotation and △△ rotation from the previous big hit or XX rotation or more. In other words, the form is variable using the number of times of hitting between big hits. The number of executions of the symbol game can be grasped by receiving the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command.
(E) A combination of two or more of the above (A) to (D).

(Changes)
As for the content of the change, the appearance rate is variable only for the specific setting suggestion effect among the setting suggestion effects 01 to 08, for example, only for the end interval screen change (setting suggestion effect 07) in FIG. There is a form that does not change with respect to the setting suggestion effect. In this embodiment, a dedicated table (for example, FIG. 61 to FIG. 62 described later) for changing the appearance rate (fluctuation) is prepared, the winning is won in the probability change big hit, and the “air battle entry screen” related to the change of the end interval screen is changed. (“Air combat rush” screen in FIG. 53) is established, and the special table is referred to, thereby changing the appearance rate. It should be noted that not only a specific setting suggestion effect but also a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects may be targeted. For example, a change in the end interval screen (setting suggestion effect 07) and a change in the winning prize mouth winning sound (setting suggestion effect 06) may be targeted.

There are two ways of changing the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect, for example, the following change pattern 1 and change pattern 2.
(Change pattern 1)
A tendency to increase the appearance rate (appearance rate) of the setting suggestion effect is created using a plurality of lottery tables. For example, the following normal table TBL1 and dedicated table TBL2 are prepared, and the appearance rate (lottery probability) is determined as follows.
TBL1: Setting 1 (20%) to Setting 6 (40%)
TBL2: setting 1 (40%) to setting 6 (60%)
A setting suggestion effect by switching from the normal table TBL1 to the dedicated table TBL2 on the basis of a predetermined change trigger, for example, information on a specific period or a specific event (arrival or progress of a specific period, occurrence of a specific event or the number of occurrences thereof). And the chances of the player encountering the setting suggestion effect increase.

(Change pattern 2)
A plurality of lottery tables is used to make the difference between the settings of the appearance rate of the setting suggestive effect remarkable. For example, the following normal table TBL1 and dedicated table TBL2 are prepared, and the appearance rate is determined as follows.
TBL1: Setting 1 (20%) to Setting 6 (40%)
TBL2: setting 1 (0%) to setting 6 (99%)

  By switching from the normal table TBL1 to the dedicated table TBL2, a specific setting range (for example, even setting (2, 4, 6), a high setting range (setting 5, 6)) or a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) The appearance rate of setting suggestion effects related to increases. In the case of the change pattern 2, the difference between the setting 1 and the setting 6 becomes significant. Therefore, for a player who intends to guess the setting, reliable information increases, which is advantageous in determining the setting 6. For example, in the case where the special table TBL2 is referred to at the time of the jackpot hit 500 or more, if the setting suggestion effect related to the variable target of the appearance rate appears after the hit 500, the setting 1 is denied. , And when it does not appear, the setting 6 is almost denied.

Hereinafter, as a predetermined change trigger, as a process on the effect control unit 24 side related to the driving amount, the number of big hits, the time or the time from power ON, etc.
(I) Out ball count command reception processing (one of the above-mentioned command analysis processing (S1008)) and lottery mode management processing 1 (FIGS. 55 to 56);
(II) jackpot start command reception processing (one of the above-mentioned command analysis processing (S1008)) and lottery mode management processing 2 (FIGS. 57 to 58)
(III) Lottery mode management process 3 based on RTC information (FIG. 59),
(IV) The lottery mode management process 4 (FIG. 60) based on the above-mentioned "out-ball count information and jackpot count information" will be described. The lottery mode management processes 1 to 4 are one form of the variable lottery mode management process (S1006) in FIG. 50, and when a predetermined change trigger comes, a lottery mode (setting the current appearance rate) related to the setting suggestion effect. This is processing for performing switching control (shift control) of the lottery state.

(Change in lottery probability depending on the number of out-balls: Figures 55 to 56)
FIG. 55 to FIG. 56 are flowcharts of the out-ball count command receiving process and the lottery mode management process 1. Here, the case where the appearance rate is changed (changed) based on the out-ball count (total out-ball count) information is described. Show. In this example, since the change opportunity depends on the number of out-balls, it is necessary to grasp out-ball number information. Therefore, when the “out ball number command” sent from the main control unit 20 is received, the counting process (S2401 described later) is executed. Then, in a variable lottery mode management process 1 in FIG. 56 described below, the lottery mode is shifted and controlled based on the count value.

  In the out-ball-number command reception processing of FIG. 55, when the above-mentioned "out-ball number command" transmitted from the main control unit 20 at a predetermined timing is received, a total out-ball number count processing is performed (S2401). Here, the result of adding the number of out balls Pout obtained by the command information to the current total number of out balls Tout is stored and held in a predetermined area of the RAM 243 as the current total number of out balls Tout. The “total out-ball count Tout” here is the total out-ball count since power-on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the total number of out balls Tout is zero (Tout = 0). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the total number of out-balls from the previous day may be taken over without clearing the total number of out-balls Tout at the time of power interruption or power-on. In this case, if the RAM 243 is not cleared at all from the time of shipment, or the backup power supply of the RAM 243 is not turned off, the value of the total number of out balls Tout will be the same as after the game machine 1 first operates in the pachinko parlor store until the present. The total number of out balls up to this.

  There are several control methods for counting the number of out-balls by a control command from the main control unit 20. One of them is a method of transmitting an out ball number command each time the OUT monitoring switch 49a detects a game ball. In other words, this is a method in which an out-ball number command is transmitted each time one out-ball is generated, and the effect control unit 24 manages each ball. This method is effective when the change trigger is in units of one ball, but a command is transmitted each time one out ball is generated, which may increase the control load. Therefore, as another method, for example, the above-mentioned number-of-balls command is sequentially transmitted for every predetermined number (1000 balls), and the effect control unit 24 manages every 1000 balls. , Command transmission timing is also reduced, and control processing is simplified. In addition, versatility can be provided when changing models. Another method is to send a control command every time a change is triggered at irregular long-term intervals such as 1000, 15000, 16000,... Since the timing is also reduced, the control load can be reduced. Further, information on the number of out-balls used for the performance information may be acquired, and a command based on this may be transmitted. Which method is to be adopted may be appropriately adopted depending on what trigger the change trigger is.

  In the lottery mode management process 1 of FIG. 56, the total number of out-balls Tout is obtained (S4001), and it is determined whether or not it is a chance to change the lottery mode (S4002). If it is not a chance to change the lottery mode (S4002: NO), the process exits the lottery mode management process 1 without doing anything. On the other hand, if it is a chance to change the lottery mode (S4002: YES), a variable lottery mode shift process for changing the lottery mode is performed (S4003). Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, three types of lottery states of “default (normal)”, “high-accuracy 1”, and “high-accuracy 2” are set as a plurality of lottery modes having different appearance rates. (Variable lottery mode; hereinafter, abbreviated as "lottery mode") (the same applies to variable lottery mode management processes 2, 3 (partial examples) and 4 in FIG. 57 described later). The relationship between the overall appearance rates in these lottery modes is “normal (default) <high probability 1 <high probability 2”. The term “overall” refers to a case where the appearance rate of a specific set value decreases but the appearance rate of another set value increases (for example, the setting of the change patterns 2A (B) and (C) in FIG. 62). Case 2) or the case where the sum of appearance rates does not change at each set value, but the appearance rate of a specific suggested color that is a setting guess element increases, and the appearance rate of other suggested colors decreases accordingly. This is because, for example, a change pattern 2 (B) in FIG. 62 described later) exists (see FIGS. 61 to 62 described later). Therefore, in the high lottery mode according to the present embodiment, the case where the appearance rate of the entire setting suggestive effect simply rises (changes to a high probability) at least as compared with the default (normal) case (FIG. 61A) ~ (E)), the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect itself does not change, but the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect having a specific setting suggestion element (for example, a specific setting suggestion color) increases. A case in which the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect having another setting suggestion element decreases (a case in which the degree of suggestion varies) is included.

  “MODE0 (variable lottery mode 0)”, “MODE1 (variable lottery mode 1)”, and “MODE2 (variable lottery mode 2)” are “default (normal)”, “high accuracy 1”, and “high accuracy”, respectively. 2 ". These lottery modes are managed by “variable lottery mode status”. The variable lottery mode status is updated each time a change trigger arrives, and the current variable lottery mode can be grasped by referring to the status value. The variable lottery mode status value is used when executing a lottery (for example, an ED character background effect lottery process shown in FIG. 58 to be described later) relating to the appearance of a setting suggestive effect, and is used in a lottery shown in FIGS. Used when selecting a table.

  In the case of this embodiment, regarding the variable lottery mode status, “01H” is set when shifting to high-accuracy 1, and “02H” is set when shifting to high-accuracy 2. Otherwise, the variable lottery mode status is set to “00H (normal)”.

  Here, when the total out ball is 0 to 6000 balls, the high accuracy 1 is set. When the total out ball is 24000 balls or more, the high accuracy 2 is set. Otherwise, the default (normal) is set. Thereby, the appearance rate (basis of lottery) of the setting suggestion effect can be changed (variable) in the specific period. Here, as a change trigger, when the total out ball is 0 to 6000 balls, the variable lottery mode status is set to “01H (high accuracy 1)” as “MODE1”, and when the total out ball is 24,000 balls or more. Sets the variable lottery mode status to "02H (high accuracy 2)" as "MODE2" (transition to the high probability lottery state). If the total number of out-balls is other than that, the variable lottery mode status is set to “00H (normal)”, and the appearance rate (basis of lottery) of the setting suggestion effect is returned to normal (transition to the low-probability lottery state). Thus, the appearance ratio (appearance ratio) of the setting suggestion effect can be changed.

(Change in lottery probability depending on the number of big hits: FIGS. 57 to 58)
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode management process 2, and FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the big hit start command receiving process. Here, a case where the appearance rate is changed based on the big hit number information (today's total big hit number) is shown. In this example, the trigger depends on the number of big hits, so it is necessary to count the number of big hits. Therefore, when the big hit number is counted, the count processing (S2516 described later) is executed when the big hit start command is received. In the variable lottery mode management process 2 in FIG. 57, the lottery mode is changed based on the count value.

  The lottery mode management process 2 in FIG. 57 will be described. In the lottery mode management process 2, first, the number of jackpot count information is obtained from the jackpot count counter (S4011), and it is determined whether or not the lottery mode change trigger has come (S4012). If the lottery mode is to be changed (S4013: YES), variable lottery mode transition processing is performed (S4013).

  The basic contents of the variable lottery mode shift processing are basically the same as the processing contents of S4003 in FIG. Here, as a change opportunity, the variable lottery mode status is set to “01H (high accuracy 1)” when the cumulative number of hits is 5 to 10 and “MODE2” when the number is 20 or more. The variable lottery mode status is set to “02H (high accuracy 2)”. Thereby, the appearance rate (basis of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect increases. If the number of hits is other than that, the variable lottery mode status is set to “00H (normal)”, and the lottery mode is returned to normal.

(Big hit start command reception processing: FIG. 58)
Next, the jackpot start command receiving process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 shows the details of the jackpot start command reception processing.

  In the jackpot start command receiving process, upon receiving the jackpot start command, the CPU 241 first performs a jackpot effect scenario lottery process (S2511). In this process, a winning scenario is selected based on the big hit type (special symbol determination data). The present example is characterized in that it is not a mere hit effect but a hit effect scenario including a setting suggestion effect (end interval screen change of the setting suggestion effect 07). Next, a variable lottery mode is obtained (S2512). In the variable lottery mode acquisition process, a lottery table corresponding to the current variable lottery mode (see S4013 in FIG. 57) is prepared. Next, the setting value information is acquired (S2513), and the process proceeds to the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514).

  In the ED character background effect lottery process (S2514), based on the “ending character background lottery table” shown in FIG. A combination of character images including the current character background image (setting suggestion object display), background color (setting suggestion background color), and the like is selected. The ending character background lottery table in FIG. 52 is an example of a dedicated table for changing the appearance rate (fluctuation). Here, the lottery mode corresponds to the default state (lottery mode 0 (normal)). FIG. 9 illustrates a lottery table to be executed (a lottery table for the variable lottery mode 0). The lottery tables corresponding to the other lottery modes 1 and 2 (high-accuracy 1 and 2) are not shown, but for convenience of explanation, the outline thereof is described in the variable lottery described later with reference to FIGS. This will be described using a mode table.

  Here, if the setting suggestion effect (combination of character images) is not to appear, (i) the lottery itself is executed, but the winning probability may be set to 0% (lottery execution mode), or (ii). A form in which the lottery itself is not executed (a prohibition process that bypasses the lottery is performed) (no lottery form) may be used. In this example, the configuration is (i).

  The current winning effect scenario data including the combination of the character images determined in the ED character background effect lottery process is set (S2515). Thereby, the effect that appears during the current series of hit games is determined. Therefore, even in the case of the same big hit, the determined display image may be different, and the difference suggests the setting.

  Thereafter, the number of big hits counter for counting the number of big hits is incremented by one, and the process exits the big hit start command receiving process (S2516). Therefore, every time the big hit start command transmitted at the start of the big hit game is received (every time the big hit start command receiving process is performed), the value of the big hit number counter is increased, and the number of big hits is cumulatively counted. The value of the jackpot count counter is used when determining a change trigger in the variable lottery mode management process 2 described above (see S4012 in FIG. 57).

(Change of lottery probability based on specific date and / or specific time information: FIG. 59)
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the lottery mode management process 3 based on the RTC information. Here, a case where the appearance rate is changed based on the RTC information is shown. In this example, the lottery mode is changed based on the RTC information acquired in the RTC information acquisition process (S1056) in FIG.

  In the lottery mode management process 3 of FIG. 59, first, RTC information is acquired (S4031), and it is determined whether or not it is a chance to change the lottery mode (S4032). If the lottery mode is to be changed (S4033: YES), variable lottery mode transition processing is performed (S4033). The basic contents of the variable lottery mode transition processing are basically the same as the processing contents of S4003 in FIG.

  The types of the variable lottery mode statuses in this example include those relating to the specific time (RTC1) (FIG. 59 (a)) and those relating to the specific date (RTC2) (FIG. 59 (b)). (FIG. 59 (c)).

In the division according to the specific time (RTC1) in FIG. 59A, “09:01:00 to 11:00” is selected as a trigger for changing to the lottery mode 0, 1, 2 (high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, normal). "18: 00-20: 00", the time is divided into other times.
In the classification related to the specific date and time (RTC2) in FIG. 59 (b), the trigger for changing to the lottery mode 0, 1, 2 (high-precision 1, high-precision 2, normal) is “specific day 1 (for example, April 29). Day), "specific day 2 (for example, December 8)", and other days.
FIG. 59 (c) shows a combination of both the specific time and the specific day (RTC1 + RTC2), and the type of the lottery mode is "highly accurate 1,""highly accurate 2,""highly accurate 3,""highly accurate 4," or "normal." , 5 types of lottery modes 0 to 4 respectively, “09:00 to 11:00”, “18:00 to 20:00”, “specific day 1 (April 29)”, “ Specific date 2 (December 8) "and other dates and times. The relationship between the appearance rates is “normal <high accuracy 1 <high accuracy 2 <high accuracy 3 <high accuracy 4”. However, in the case of the specific dates 1 and 2, the trigger for changing to "high-accuracy 1, 2" and the trigger for changing to "high-accuracy 3, 4" may overlap. Thus, the lottery mode to be transferred to is determined on the basis of the priority of which one of the lottery modes is prioritized (see “Lottery Mode Priority” described later). In this example, the order is “normal <high accuracy 1 <high accuracy 2 <high accuracy 3 <high accuracy 4”. Therefore, in the case of the specific days 1 and 2, the lottery modes 3 and 4 (high accuracy 3 and 4) are prioritized, and the other lottery modes 0 to 3 (normally high accuracy 1 and 2) are not shifted.

  Further, FIG. 59 (d) specifies the change opportunity based on the elapsed time from the power-on (RTC4), and the change opportunity to the lottery mode 0, 1, 2 (high accuracy 1, high accuracy 2, normal). , "Until 2 hours have elapsed since the power was turned on", and "until 9 hours have passed since the power was turned on, until 11 hours have passed".

(Change in lottery probability due to out-ball count information + jackpot count information: FIG. 60)
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a lottery mode management process 4 based on “number of out-balls information + number of big hits”. Here, a case is shown in which the appearance rate is changed based on a plurality of pieces of information of the number of out-balls and the number of jackpots. In this example, the number-of-out-balls information is information on the total number of out-balls since the power was turned on today, and the information on the number of hits is information on the number of hits from the power-on today.

  In this lottery mode management processing 4, first, the total out ball information and the total number of big hits information are acquired, and it is determined whether or not it is a chance to change the lottery mode (S4101 to S4103). If the lottery mode is to be changed (S4103: YES), variable lottery mode transition processing is performed (S4104).

  The basic contents of the variable lottery mode shift processing are basically the same as the processing contents of S4003 in FIG. Here, as a change opportunity, in the case of “the total number of big hits is less than 20 and the total number of out-balls is 0 to 6000”, the variable lottery mode status is set to “01H (high accuracy 1)” as “MODE1,” In the case of “the total number of big hits is 20 or more, or the total number of out balls is 24000 or more”, the variable lottery mode status is set to “02H (high accuracy 2)” as “MODE2”. Thereby, the appearance rate (basis of the lottery) of the setting suggestion effect increases. Otherwise, the variable lottery mode status is set to “00H (normal)”, and the lottery mode is returned to normal.

(Lottery mode priority)
By the way, as described above, when the appearance rate is changed based on two or more types of information such as the RTC information, the total number of outgoing balls, the total number of big hits, and the power-on elapsed time, the timing of the change trigger occurs repeatedly, There is a problem as to which of the lottery modes should be shifted to. More specifically, for example, when the RTC information is on the specific day 1 (April 29), the process is shifted to the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), but when the total number of out balls is 0 to 6000, When shifting to the lottery mode 1 (high-accuracy 1), if no conditions are given, if today is April 29, the power is turned on despite staying in the lottery mode 2 (high-accuracy 2). At times, since the total number of out balls is 0, there is a problem that the mode is shifted to the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1). Therefore, a priority order regarding which information is to be used as a priority change trigger and which lottery mode is given priority is determined by one of the following methods (A) and (B).
(A) A mode of assigning a priority order among a plurality of pieces of information. For example, in the case where the RTC information, the number of out-balls, and the number of big hits are adopted, the order of priority is set in the order of “the number of out-balls <the number of big hits <RTC information”. In this example, the RTC information has the highest priority.
(B) A mode in which a mode advantageous to the player is prioritized with reference to the current lottery mode.
In the above case, the game shifts to the high-accuracy 2 based on the RTC information, but the game period is shifted to the high-accuracy 1 based on the total number of out-balls, so that the game is shifted to the high-accuracy 2 which is advantageous to the player. .

(Example of change pattern 1: FIG. 61)
61 to 62 show examples of the lottery probability fluctuation under the specific conditions as described above. The change pattern 1 in FIG. 61 has seven types of variable lottery tables (A) to (G) corresponding to the lottery modes 0 to 6. In FIG. 61, the reminders of (A) to (G) indicate a change opportunity, and in the drawing, are referred to as “variable lottery mode o lottery table” for convenience of explanation. Here, a variable lottery table used in a configuration that manages the lottery mode based on the above-mentioned “out-ball number information + big hit number information” is illustrated, and here, a mode in which seven types of lottery modes are handled is illustrated. It is. For example, lottery modes 0 to 7 = normally high accuracy 1 to 6.

  Each table shows the content suggesting the set value with the appearance ratio (appearance rate) of the setting suggestive color (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) for each of the settings 1 to 6. The values in this table are not always constant. As described above, when the total number of out-balls or the total number of big hits changes, the lottery mode is changed accordingly, and the appearance ratio changes.

  As can be seen from the figure, the number of big hits is fixed to less than 20 up to the lottery tables corresponding to the lottery modes 0 to 4 (normally, high accuracy 1 to high accuracy 4) shown in FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (E). When the total number of outgoing balls is gradually increased from 1 to 1000, 1001 to 6000, 6001 to 12000, 1200 to 24000, 24001 or more, the settings 2 to 6 ( In this example, it is shown that the appearance ratio of the setting suggestive colors (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) in the setting 1 appears only in the default color is gradually increased. In addition, the lottery tables corresponding to the lottery modes 5 to 6 (highly accurate 5 to highly accurate 6) shown in FIGS. 61 (E) to (F) make the number of out balls irrelevant and the number of big hits is 21 to 30, 31 times When the number increases as described above, the content indicates that the appearance ratio of the setting suggestive colors (copper, silver, gold, D pattern, rainbow) in settings 2 to 6 increases. In the case of the change pattern example 1, in short, the content in which the setting suggestion effect appears increases as the lottery mode becomes higher.

  Here, when the lottery mode 4 (highly accurate 4) and the lottery mode 5 (highly accurate 5) are compared, the relationship of the appearance rate is “highly accurate 5 <highly accurate 4”. As an opportunity, the shift from the lottery mode 0 to 5 (normal to high accuracy 5) is performed by a change opportunity based on two kinds of information of the total number of outgoing balls and the total number of big hits, and the lottery mode 5 to 6 (high accuracy 5 to 5). The high accuracy 6) is performed by a change trigger based on one type of information of the actual number of hits, regardless of the total number of outgoing balls. Therefore, in consideration of the fact that the elements that determine the change trigger are greatly different, the appearance rates are reversed between the lottery mode 4 (high accuracy 4) and the lottery mode 5 (high accuracy 5). In any case, each of the lottery modes 1 to 6 (high probability 1 to high probability 6) tends to have a higher appearance rate than at least the lottery mode 0 (normal). Note that the position of the total 0 (appearance rate 0%) does not change through the lottery modes 0 to 6.

(Example 2 of change pattern: left side of FIG. 62)
The change pattern 2A in FIG. 62 has variable lottery tables (lottery tables for variable lottery modes 0 to 3) corresponding to lottery modes 0 to 3 (normal to high accuracy 2), as shown on the left side of FIG. Lottery mode 0 corresponds to the default (normal), lottery mode 1 corresponds to the period of less than 20 big hits and 6,000 out balls, and lottery mode 2 corresponds to the period of 20 or more big hits and 24,000 out balls. It is a lottery table. Lottery mode 0 (normal), 1 (high accuracy 1), 2 (high accuracy 2) in the order of 0% ("-" column) has increased the arrangement, it is easy to estimate the set value I have. For example, while staying in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), the setting suggestion effect (silver or more) for this lottery table only appears and the setting 3 or more is fixed (settings 1 and 2 have an appearance rate of 0%), If the setting suggestion effect does not appear, setting 5 is almost negated (because the proportion of any color appears is 90%), and setting 6 is completely negated (since the proportion of any color appears is 100%). Becomes

(Modification pattern example 3: right side of FIG. 62)
62 has a variable lottery table (lottery table for variable lottery modes 0 to 3) corresponding to lottery modes 0 to 3 (normal to high accuracy 2), as shown on the right side of FIG. Each table is triggered by the same change as the change pattern 2A in FIG. 62, but the total value increases in the order of the lottery modes 0 (normal), 1 (high accuracy 1), and 2 (high accuracy 2). I have. A characteristic point is that, as the lottery mode becomes higher, a suggestion color that is easy to guess can appear (the degree of suggestion increases).

  As can be seen from FIG. 62, in lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1), setting 2 is copper, setting 3 is silver, setting 4 is gold, setting 5 is D pattern, and setting 6 is rainbow. It has. For example, for the copper color, the lottery mode 0 (normal) has a uniform appearance rate of 3.2% in the settings 2 to 6, but in the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1), the copper color appearance rate is 3 and the setting 2 is 3 .2%, settings 2 to 6 have an extremely low appearance rate of 0.1% to 0.2%, and settings 3 and higher result in a mode in which no copper color appears. In particular, the rate of decrease in the high setting area (setting 6 in this example) becomes significant. Also, a characteristic point is that in the lottery mode 1 (high accuracy 1) and the lottery mode 0 (normal), “the total appearance rate itself does not change” with each set value (the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect itself does not change). However, it is the default), but the point is that the appearance rate of a specific suggestion color that is a setting guess element has increased and other suggestion colors have decreased accordingly. When the “degree” is changed, a special lottery mode of “setting is easy to guess” is set. For example, in the case of the setting 3, the appearance rate of the silver color is increased, and the appearance rate of the copper color is reduced, so that “silver” is more likely to appear. In the case of the setting 4, the appearance rate of the gold color is increased. , The appearance rate of copper color decreases (in this example, the appearance rate of silver color does not change), and “gold” tends to appear. In the case of setting 2, the appearance rate of “copper color” does not change, but In the setting 2, the appearance rate of “copper color” decreases, and in the case of setting 2, the “copper color” appears more easily than other setting values. , Can be created according to the lottery mode.

  Also, in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), there is a tendency that the settings 1 and 2 are default colors, the setting 3 is silver, the setting 4 is gold, the setting 5 is a D pattern color, and the setting 6 is a rainbow pattern. . If a setting suggestive effect (silver or more) for this lottery table appears while staying in the lottery mode 2 (high accuracy 2), setting 3 or more (intermediate setting area or more) is determined.

(Specific example of setting suggestion effect: Fig. 63)
FIG. 63 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect when the lottery tables of FIGS. 61 to 62 are applied. FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (C) illustrate setting suggestive effects that can appear in a pre-reach period (for example, timings 10 to 16 in FIG. 45), and FIGS. 63 (D) to 63 (F) illustrate reach. This is an example of setting suggestion effects that can appear in a later period (for example, timings 17 to 25 in FIG. 45). In this example, each is a setting suggestion effect (effect during fluctuation) during a symbol game.

  In the setting suggestion effect exemplified here, setting suggestion is performed based on the color type (the alien character's body color type) attached to the specific object display (the alien character). However, when setting 6 is suggested, another rainbow-colored object display (unconfirmed flying object character) appears in a blessing sense. Of course, instead of an unidentified flying object character, the same alien character may be given a rainbow color. This setting suggestion effect is an effect mode including a setting suggestion element image (body color of an alien) capable of notifying the difference in the setting value according to the display mode type using different colors and / or patterns. Here, the case where the body color is gray is the default (no suggestion of setting), the copper color is setting 2 or more, setting 3 to 5, silver is setting 3 or more, gold is setting 4 or more, and rainbow is setting 6 It suggests confirmation. In FIG. 63, the example of the setting suggestion effect that appears during the symbol game has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect that appears at a timing other than during the symbol game, for example, the setting suggestion effect that can appear during the big hit game. The present invention can be applied to any of 06 to 08 (large prize mouth winning sound change notice, end interval screen change, blessing voice, etc.), and setting suggestive effects that can appear while waiting for customers (such as character images in ranking display).

  A configuration in which one or more of all the embodiments described above (including all the configurations and modifications described in the embodiments) may be combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to the individual embodiments only. It is not limited.

  In each of the embodiments described above, a pachinko game machine using a game ball as a game medium has been described, but there is no particular limitation as long as the game machine can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a game machine using a game medal as a game medium, a game machine using a game medium using electromagnetic recording (a so-called “management-type game machine”), a spinning machine, or the like may be used.

  The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 gaming machines,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 game ball payout device,
20 main control unit (main control board)
24 Production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board)
28 launch control board,
29 payout control board,
34, 34a upper starting port, upper starting port sensor 35, 35a lower starting port, lower starting port sensor,
37, 37a normal symbol starting port, normal symbol starting port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Winning prize mouth, Winning prize mouth sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable prize winning device, Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 liquid crystal display device, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 Out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 setting display,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241, 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM

Claims (1)

Operating means operable by the player;
Lottery means capable of executing a jackpot lottery,
Display means capable of changing display and stop display of symbols,
Display control means capable of display control by the display means,
An effect means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
Effect control means capable of effect control by the effect means,
Special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the jackpot lottery is a predetermined result,
In a gaming machine having a different probability that the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a predetermined result according to a set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages,
The setting suggestion effect execution control means capable of controlling execution of the setting suggestion effect related to the setting value using the effect means,
The setting suggestion effect execution control means includes a first setting suggestion effect that can appear during a period from a predetermined timing after power is turned on until a predetermined first condition is satisfied, and at least after the predetermined first condition is satisfied. performing at least controllable der second set suggested effect capable emerge, the period of is,
The first setting suggestion effect does not appear again at least until the power is turned off after the predetermined first condition is satisfied .
A gaming machine characterized by that: